Dodge Challenger 2023

2023 DODGE CHALLENGER OWNER’S MANUAL
2023 DODGE CHALLENGER

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling
your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Dodge brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the
ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play ® Store and enter the search keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
©2022 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS. DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC OR FCA CANADA INC., USED UNDER LICENSE. DODGE EST UNE MARQUE FIRST EDITION
DÉPOSÉE DE FCA US LLC OU FCA CANADA INC., UTILISÉE SOUS LE PERMIS. APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC. GOOGLE PLAY STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GOOGLE. 23_LA_OM_EN_USC
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal
features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical
US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on
products previously manufactured. devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is
found by visiting the website on the back cover. always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 or by contacting your This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Dodge brand
1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer. dealer.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA) Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use public
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
transportation.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
WARNING
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have
been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
23_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 7 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................12 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 56 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ..................................................................................................71 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................106 5
6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 159 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................199 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 223 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 273
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................280
10
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................. 285
11
INTRODUCTION DOORS .................................................................................21 MIRRORS ............................................................................ 35

Manual Door Locks......................................................21 Inside Rearview Mirror ................................................ 35
SYMBOLS KEY ....................................................................... 8 Power Door Locks .......................................................22 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .......................................... 35
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......................... 8 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Outside Mirrors............................................................ 35
SYMBOL GLOSSARY............................................................. 9 Passive Entry................................................................22 Power Mirrors .............................................................. 36
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped .........................24 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................................... 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit .................................24 UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
KEYS .....................................................................................12 STEERING WHEEL............................................................... 24 (HOMELINK®) .................................................................... 36
Key Fob ........................................................................ 12 Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® ............ 36
SENTRY KEY ........................................................................15 If Equipped ...................................................................24 Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....................... 37
IGNITION SWITCH .............................................................15 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .................................... 15 If Equipped ...................................................................25 Or Non-Rolling Code Device........................................ 37
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ......................................17 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped........................25 Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 17 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ....................................26 Opener ......................................................................... 37
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................................ 18 Introducing Voice Recognition ....................................26 Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — Basic Voice Commands...............................................26 Device .......................................................................... 38
If Equipped .................................................................. 18 Get Started...................................................................26 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button........... 38
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped.......... 18 Additional Information.................................................27 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................... 38
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ................. 27 Security ........................................................................ 39
Activation — If Equipped ............................................. 19 Programming The Memory Feature............................28 Troubleshooting Tips................................................... 39
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped........... 19 Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To Memory.........28 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................................. 39
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..................19 Memory Position Recall...............................................28 Headlight Switch.......................................................... 39
To Arm The System ..................................................... 19 SEATS ................................................................................... 28 Multifunction Lever ..................................................... 40
To Disarm The System................................................ 19 Manual Adjustment Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped.......... 40
Rearming The System................................................. 20 (Front Seats) — If Equipped.........................................29 High/Low Beam Switch .............................................. 40
Security System Manual Override.............................. 20 Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...............................30 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
Tamper Alert................................................................ 20 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped .........30 If Equipped................................................................... 40
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — Heated Seats — If Equipped .......................................31 Flash-To-Pass............................................................... 41
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................................20 Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped.........................32 Automatic Headlights ................................................. 41
To Arm The System ..................................................... 20 Vehicles Without Passenger Seating Installed ..........32 Parking Lights ............................................................. 41
To Disarm The System................................................ 20 Passenger Seat Easy Entry .........................................33 Automatic Headlights With Wipers............................. 41
Security System Manual Override.............................. 21 Head Restraints ...........................................................34
Headlight Time Delay ................................................. 41 HOOD.................................................................................... 54 STARTING AND OPERATING

Lights-On Reminder ................................................... 41 Opening The Hood .......................................................54
Fog Lights — If Equipped ............................................ 42 Closing The Hood.........................................................54 STARTING THE ENGINE...................................................... 71
Turn Signals .............................................................. 42 TRUNK ..................................................................................54 Manual Transmission — If Equipped.......................... 71
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................. 42 Opening The Trunk ......................................................54 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped...................... 71
INTERIOR LIGHTS ...............................................................42 Closing The Trunk ........................................................55 Normal Starting ........................................................... 71
Front Map/Reading Lights ........................................ 42 Trunk Safety ................................................................55 AutoPark ...................................................................... 72
Ambient Light — If Equipped ...................................... 42 Cargo Area Features....................................................55 Extended Park Starting ............................................... 73
Dimmer Controls ........................................................ 43 If Engine Fails To Start ............................................... 74
Cold Weather Operation
Illuminated Entry ........................................................ 43 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...........................44 (Below –22°F Or −30°C) .......................................... 74
INSTRUMENT PANEL After Starting................................................................ 74
Windshield Wiper Operation....................................... 44
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........................... 45 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .....................................................56 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
CLIMATE CONTROLS ..........................................................45 Instrument Cluster Descriptions.................................57 3.6L & 5.7L ......................................................................... 74
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .....................................57 PARKING BRAKE ................................................................ 74
And Functions ............................................................. 45 Location And Controls .................................................58 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ...................... 76
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...................... 48 Engine Oil Life Reset ...................................................59 6-Speed Manual Transmission................................... 76
Climate Voice Commands .......................................... 48 Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) — If Equipped .......59 Shifting......................................................................... 76
Operating Tips ............................................................ 48 Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Recommended Shift Speeds...................................... 77
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............................49 Menu Items ..................................................................60 1–4 Skip Shift ............................................................. 77
Storage ........................................................................ 49 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Downshifting................................................................ 77
Illuminated Cupholders — If Equipped....................... 50 Mode Message — Electrical Load Reduction AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
USB/AUX Control......................................................... 50 Actions — If Equipped ..................................................62 IF EQUIPPED ...................................................................... 78
Electrical Power Outlets.............................................. 50 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................................ 63 Ignition Park Interlock ................................................. 78
WINDOWS............................................................................52 Red Warning Lights .....................................................63 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
Power Window Controls.............................................. 52 Yellow Warning Lights .................................................66 (BTSI) System ............................................................. 79
Wind Buffeting............................................................. 52 Yellow Indicator Lights ................................................68 8-Speed Automatic Transmission ............................. 79
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED...................................52 Green Indicator Lights.................................................68 SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ............................. 53 White Indicator Lights..................................................69 CONTROL ............................................................................. 83
Pinch Protect Feature — If Equipped ......................... 53 Blue Indicator Lights....................................................69 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L — IF EQUIPPED .......... 83
Sunshade Operation................................................... 53 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .....................69 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ........................................... 83
Sunroof Maintenance ................................................. 53 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ................. 84
Ignition Off Operation.................................................. 53 Cybersecurity ...............................................................70 Cruise Control ............................................................. 84
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .................................... 85
PROGRAMS ........................................................................ 70
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .........92 MULTIMEDIA SAFETY

ParkSense Sensors..................................................... 92
ParkSense Display ...................................................... 92 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ..................................................... 106 SAFETY FEATURES ...........................................................159
ParkSense Warning Display ....................................... 94 CYBERSECURITY ............................................................. 106 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................159
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense............................ 94 UCONNECT SETTINGS .................................................... 107 Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...................160
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System..... 94 Customer Programmable Features ......................... 107 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .......................................164
Cleaning The ParkSense System ............................... 95 UCONNECT INTRODUCTION............................................ 121 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped ............164
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ..................... 95 System Overview ...................................................... 121 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation —
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ..............................96 Drag & Drop Menu Bar............................................. 123 If Equipped.................................................................167
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..................................................96 Safety And General Information .............................. 123 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ................168
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .................................. 97 UCONNECT MODES ......................................................... 124 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................................172
VEHICLE LOADING ..............................................................97 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................................ 124 Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....................172
Vehicle Certification Label ......................................... 98 Radio Mode .............................................................. 125 Important Safety Precautions...................................172
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ........................ 98 Media Mode ............................................................. 133 Seat Belt Systems ....................................................172
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............................. 98 Phone Mode ............................................................. 135 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ..................178
Overloading ................................................................. 98 ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — Child Restraints ........................................................185
Loading ....................................................................... 98 IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 144 SAFETY TIPS......................................................................196
TRAILER TOWING ...............................................................98 Android Auto™ ......................................................... 144 Transporting Passengers ..........................................196
Common Towing Definitions ...................................... 99 Apple CarPlay®......................................................... 146 Transporting Pets ...................................................196
Trailer Hitch Classification........................................ 100 Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips Connected Vehicles...................................................196
Trailer Towing Weights And Tricks.................................................................. 147 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)........................... 100 PERFORMANCE PAGES .................................................. 148 The Vehicle ...............................................................196
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...................................... 101 Home ......................................................................... 148 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Towing Requirements ............................................... 101 Timers........................................................................ 150 Outside The Vehicle ..................................................198
Towing Tips ............................................................... 103 Gauges ...................................................................... 152 Exhaust Gas...............................................................198
RECREATIONAL TOWING G-Force ...................................................................... 152 Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....................................198
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ................................................. 104 Engine........................................................................ 153
DRIVING TIPS ................................................................... 104 Dynamometer (Dyno) ............................................... 153
Driving On Slippery Surfaces.................................... 104 DODGE DRIVE MODES — IF EQUIPPED......................... 154
Driving Through Water ............................................. 105 Performance Control — If Equipped ........................ 154
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.................. 158
Regulatory And Safety Information.......................... 158
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TIRES..................................................................................253

Tire Safety Information .............................................253
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..................................... 199 SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................ 223 Tires — General Information .....................................261
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED .................. 199 3.6L And 5.7L Engines ............................................ 223 Tire Types...................................................................264
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING...................................... 202 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................................ 228 Spare Tires — If Equipped.........................................264
Preparations For Jacking.......................................... 202 3.6L Engine .............................................................. 228 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................................266
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ......................... 202 5.7L Engine .............................................................. 229 Snow Traction Devices .............................................267
Jacking And Changing A Tire ................................... 203 Checking Oil Level .................................................... 230 Tire Rotation Recommendations .............................268
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ................................. 206 Adding Washer Fluid................................................. 230 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
Alternate Tire Service Kit — If Equipped .................. 211 Maintenance-Free Battery ....................................... 231 TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...................................................268
JUMP STARTING .............................................................. 216 Pressure Washing..................................................... 231 Treadwear..................................................................268
Preparations For Jump Start .................................... 216 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................................. 231 Traction Grades .........................................................269
Jump Starting Procedure.......................................... 217 Engine Oil ................................................................. 231 Temperature Grades .................................................269
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ........................................ 218 Engine Oil Filter......................................................... 233 VEHICLE STORAGE ...........................................................269
MANUAL PARK RELEASE–8–SPEED Engine Air Cleaner Filter........................................... 233 BODYWORK ......................................................................270
TRANSMISSION ............................................................... 218 Air Conditioner Maintenance ................................... 234 Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......................270
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE............................................ 220 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection............................... 235 Body And Underbody Maintenance..........................270
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ..................................... 221 Body Lubrication....................................................... 235 Preserving The Bodywork .........................................270
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models — If Equipped.......... 222 Windshield Wiper Blades ......................................... 236 INTERIORS ........................................................................271
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models ............................. 222 Exhaust System ........................................................ 237 Seats And Fabric Parts..............................................271
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Cooling System ......................................................... 237 Plastic And Coated Parts ..........................................271
SYSTEM (EARS) ............................................................... 222 Brake System ........................................................... 240 Leather Surfaces .......................................................272
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..................................... 222 Clutch Hydraulic System — Glass Surfaces ..........................................................272
Manual Transmission (If Equipped) ........................ 240
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ....................... 240
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped................... 241
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped ...................... 241
Rear Axle ................................................................... 241
Fuses ......................................................................... 242
Bulb Replacement .................................................... 250
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................282

MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................282
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)..................... 273 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................282
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................................ 273 YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................ 280 In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........282
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .............. 273 Prepare For The Appointment.................................. 280 In Canada...................................................................283
Torque Specifications ............................................... 273 Prepare A List............................................................ 280 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................283
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 274 Be Reasonable With Requests ................................ 280 GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................284
3.6L Engine ............................................................... 274 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............................................. 280 CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS.......................284
5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission) ........... 274 Roadside Assistance ................................................ 280
5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) ............... 274 FCA US LLC Customer Center .................................. 281
Reformulated Gasoline............................................. 275 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .......................... 281
Materials Added To Fuel .......................................... 275 Mexico ....................................................................... 281
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends..................................... 275 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ........................... 281
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles............. 275 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .................. 276 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .................................... 282
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Service Contract ...................................................... 282
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ................................. 276
Fuel System Cautions ............................................... 276
FLUID CAPACITIES ........................................................... 277
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................... 278
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................. 279
INTRODUCTION
1
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Dodge vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner's Manual has been
prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented
documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining
its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important
warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible
way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Dodge best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
SYMBOLS KEY VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

These statements apply to operating procedures that
WARNING! WARNING!
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
These statements apply to procedures that could result in Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
CAUTION! and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
damage to your vehicle.
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation,
NOTE:
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
WARNING!
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the
TIP: To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH when using “Track-Use” parts and equipment:
product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW  NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment on public roads. FCA US LLC does not autho-
Follow this reference for additional information on a rize the use of “Track-Use” equipment on public roads.
particular feature.  The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is for race vehicles on race tracks. To help
ensure the safety of the race driver, engineers should supervise the installation of
“Track-Use” parts.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the  FCA US LLC does not authorize the installation or use of any part noted as
topic. “Track-Use” on any new vehicle prior to its first retail sale.
WARNING!
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
 ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” equipment before driving on public roads.
 ALWAYS properly use your three-point seat belts when driving on public roads.
 In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light 1
your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol Ú page 63. Ú page 64
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear. Ú page 65
Red Warning Lights

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Air Bag Warning Light Ú page 65
Ú page 63
Transmission Temperature Warning Light

Brake Warning Light Ú page 66
Ú page 64
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light

Battery Charge Warning Light Ú page 65
Ú page 64
Trunk Open Warning Light

Door Open Warning Light Ú page 65
Ú page 64
Vehicle Security Warning Light

Oil Pressure Warning Light Ú page 66
Ú page 65
Oil Temperature Warning Light

Ú page 65
10
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL) Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 67 Ú page 66
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light Service AWD Warning Light
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light

Ú page 68
11
Green Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Vehicle Indicator Light Cruise Control Set Indicator Light 1
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle Indicator Light Sport Mode Indicator Light
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

Ú page 68 White Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light

Front Fog Indicator Light Ú page 69
Ú page 68
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light

Turn Signal Indicator Lights Ú page 69
Ú page 69
ECO Mode Indicator Light Blue Indicator Lights

Ú page 69
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 69
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
KEY F OB battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), follow Ú page 284.
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote Start
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Trunk
(if equipped), and remote trunk operation. The key fob
allows you to lock or unlock the doors and trunk from Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob unlock the driver's door or twice within five seconds to
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the unlock all doors. Push and release the lock button on the
system. The key fob also contains an emergency key, key fob to lock all doors.
which is stored in the rear of the key fob. When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
NOTE: and the illuminated entry features will be activated. When
the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the
 The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key horn will chirp. This setting can be adjusted in the
Key Fob
fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other Uconnect system Ú page 107.
electronic device. This may result in poor performance. 1 — Unlock
 With ignition in the ON position and the vehicle moving 2 — Trunk Open NOTE:
at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled. 3 — Lock  If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob, and no door
4 — Remote Start (If Equipped) is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and
the Vehicle Security system (if equipped) will arm.
5 — PANIC Button
 If one or more doors are open, or the trunk is open, the
6 — Emergency Key
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automati-
cally if the key fob is left inside the passenger compart-
ment, otherwise the doors will stay locked.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push Key Left Vehicle Feature  Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
of the unlock button through Uconnect Settings housing or the printed circuit board.
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
Ú page 107. 1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
NOTE: START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The emergency key release (1) on the back of the key fob
When you use the key fob to open any door, the courtesy Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display and pulling the emergency key out with your other
hand.
lights, overhead lights, and approach lighting in the along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and visual 2
outside mirrors (if equipped) will turn on. alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
To Unlatch The Trunk The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
Push the trunk button on the key fob two times within five
seconds to unlatch the trunk. NOTE:
Using The Panic Feature  The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
the vehicle to detect a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle
To turn the Panic feature on or off, push the Panic button feature will not activate until all of the doors are closed.
on the key fob. When the Panic feature is activated, the
 These alerts will not be activated in situations where
turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
the interior lights will turn on.
inside.
The Panic feature will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob Emergency Key Removal
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 1 — Emergency Key Release Button
greater. battery.
2 — Emergency Key
NOTE: NOTE:
 The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in  Customers are recommended to use a battery
the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic feature is obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery
remain on. dimensions.
 You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the  Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
feature due to the radio frequency noises emitted by further information.
the system.
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Separate the key fob halves using a flat-head NOTE: 3. Remove the back cover to access and replace the
screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the two halves of Separating the case can also be done with a flat-head battery. When replacing the battery, match the (+)
the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal screwdriver. sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of the
during removal. battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
WARNING!
 The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
Separating Case With A Flat-Head Screwdriver cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
Emergency Key Removal can lead to death.
 If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
 Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close securely,
stop using the product and keep it away from
children.
Key Fob Battery Replacement

Separating Case With A Coin
Programming And Requesting Additional NOTE: If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
Key Fobs  When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
Programming the key fob may be performed by an this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
rized dealer.
authorized dealer. by an authorized dealer.
 Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
NOTE: the vehicle locks.
CAUTION! 2
 Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle. SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
 Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system and loss of security protection.
WARNING! does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
 Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock unlocked. NOTE:
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. A key fob that has not been programmed is also
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
considered an invalid key.
 For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
OFF position when exiting the vehicle. that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start been programmed to the vehicle electronics Ú page 284.
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
key fob obtained from another vehicle. IGNITION SWITCH
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
that has never been programmed. bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with passenger compartment.
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used
to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle
electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two
seconds.
The START/STOP ignition button has four operating ACC

positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate WARNING!
 Engine is not started.
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and  When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
 Some electrical devices are available
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During START, RUN from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
(e.g. power windows).
will illuminate.
ON/RUN  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
 Driving position. access to an unlocked vehicle.
 All electrical devices are available  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
(e.g. climate controls, etc.). dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
START could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
 The engine will start. be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the push of a  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In a location accessible to children, and do not leave
this situation, a backup method can be used to operate the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter
the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child could operate
emergency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
START/STOP Ignition Button
ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch.  Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
1 — OFF
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
2 — ACC serious injury or death.
3 — ON/RUN
The push button ignition can be placed in the following CAUTION!

modes:
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
OFF remove key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors
 The engine is stopped. when leaving the vehicle unattended.
 Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are still available.
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure

NOTE:  If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the

WARNING! vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
 When opening the driver's door with the ignition in
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or  The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon Remote Start mode.
remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position.
In addition to the chime, the message will display monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.  For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in
“Ignition Or Accessory On” in the cluster.
serious injury or death when inhaled. the Remote Start mode. 2
 For more information on proper engine starting
procedures, see Ú page 71.  The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
 Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED controls could cause serious injury or death.
a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
This system uses the key fob to start the engine engine will remote start:
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still HOW TO USE R EMOTE S TART  Gear selector in PARK
maintaining security. The system has a range  Doors closed
of 328 ft (100 m). Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the  Hood closed
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,  Trunk closed
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient Hazard switch off
(if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the 
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
NOTE: 15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a third  Battery at an acceptable charge level
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce time shuts the engine off.  Panic button not pushed
this range Ú page 284. To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place the  System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
ignition in the ON/RUN position.  Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
NOTE:
 With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
 Remote Start can only be used twice.
 Ignition in the OFF position NOTE: REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —

 Fuel level meets minimum requirement
 Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
 To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will I F E QUIPPED
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
 Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated Start request. When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
 For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
WARNING! Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or Active — Push Start Button” will show in the instrument if selected in the Comfort menu screen within Uconnect
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon cluster display until you push the START/STOP ignition Settings Ú page 107. In warm weather, the driver vented
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. button. seat feature will automatically turn on when Remote Start
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause Remote Start will also cancel if any of the following occur: is activated, if programmed in the Comfort menu screen.
serious injury or death when inhaled. The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
 The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 RPM. depending on the outside ambient temperature.
 Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the  Any engine warning lights come on.
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
 The Low Fuel Light turns on.
controls could cause serious injury or death.  The hood is opened. The climate controls will be automatically adjusted to the
 The hazard switch is pushed. optimal temperature and mode settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature. This will occur until the
TO EXIT R EMOTE START MODE  The gear selector is moved out of PARK.
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
 The brake pedal is pressed. climate controls will resume their previous settings.
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button on the REMOTE START F RONT DEFROST Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED  In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the door climate settings will default to maximum heat, with
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system (if When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
push and release the START/STOP ignition button. automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.  In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the The timing is dependent on the ambient temperature. (26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or if Once the timer expires, the system will automatically settings selected by the driver.
the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. adjust the settings depending on ambient conditions.  In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or above, the
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level Mode,
climate controls will resume the previously set operations next section for detailed operation. with Recirculation on.
(temperature, blower control, etc.).
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM
settings, see Ú page 45. the ON/RUN position.
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of Remote VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED the following methods:
Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.  Push the unlock button on the key fob.
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors for
 Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door
The climate control settings will change if manually unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition
Ú page 22.
2
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote Start for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
mode, and exit automatic override. This includes the OFF system is armed, interior switches for door locks and trunk  Push the START/STOP ignition button (requires at least
button on the climate controls, which will turn the system release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the one valid key fob in the vehicle).
off. Vehicle Security system will provide the following audible NOTE:
REMOTE START W INDSHIELD W IPER and visible signals:
 The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button on
 The horn will pulse the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
DE-I CER ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED  The turn signals will flash system.
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient  The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will  When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield flash power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper TO ARM THE SYSTEM vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue. system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
REMOTE START C ANCEL MESSAGE — 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF Security system will arm, regardless of whether you are in
position.
I F EQUIPPED the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
One of the following messages will display in the vehicle: Vehicle Security system.
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
 Push lock on the interior power door lock switch If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
with the driver and/or passenger door open. becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
 Remote Start Canceled — Door Open remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
 Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
 Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open door handle with a valid key fob available in the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
 Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low same exterior zone Ú page 22. occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
 Remote Start Canceled — Trunk Open
 Push the lock button on the key fob.
 Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
3. If any doors are open, close them.
REARMING T HE S YSTEM This will continue for eight cycles if no action is taken to  The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
disarm the system. actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm the
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can turn off
disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off TO ARM THE SYSTEM the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming the
after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds between cycles Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the lock button
Follow these steps to arm the security system:
and up to eight cycles if the trigger remains active) and on the key fob three times within 15 seconds of arming
then rearm itself. 1. If any doors, windows, or the sunroof (if equipped) the system (while the Vehicle Security Light is flashing
are open, close them. rapidly). The vehicle will remain locked but will disable
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE 2. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF. the alarm in the case of repeated false alarms due to
ambient conditions.
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the 3. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
doors using the manual door lock. vehicle: TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM
TAMPER A LERT  Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open. The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security system in  Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the door handle with a key fob available in the same  Push the unlock button on the key fob.
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the exterior zone Ú page 22.  Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door
Vehicle Security system. Ú page 22.
 Push the lock button on the key fob.
 Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position
DELUXE VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — NOTE: by pushing the START/STOP ignition button (requires at
least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
IF EQUIPPED  When armed, the interior motion sensor detects move-
ment within the vehicle's interior, including moving NOTE:
The Deluxe Vehicle Security system monitors the doors, objects (i.e. people and pets) and air currents through  The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button on
hood latch, and trunk for unauthorized entry and the open windows or the sunroof. The windows and the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
ignition switch for unauthorized operation. The system sunroof should be closed, and moving objects should system.
also includes a dual function intrusion sensor and vehicle not be left in the vehicle when the intrusion detection  The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
tilt sensor. The intrusion sensor monitors the vehicle is armed, otherwise false alarms can occur. power trunk entry. If a valid key fob or key fob Passive
interior for motion. The vehicle tilt sensor monitors the  Once the security system is armed, it remains in that Entry is used to open the trunk, the motion sensing will
vehicle for any tilting actions (tow away, tire removal, ferry state until you disarm it by following either of the be suppressed until after the trunk is closed. If
transport, etc.). disarming procedures described. If a power loss occurs someone enters the opened vehicle through the trunk,
If a perimeter violation triggers the security system, the after arming the system, you must disarm the system then opens any door, the alarm will sound.
horn will sound for 29 seconds and the exterior lights will after restoring power to prevent alarm activation.
flash followed by approximately five seconds of no activity.
 When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior

power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
DOORS WARNING!
 The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm the
MANUAL D OOR L OCKS  For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
Vehicle Security system. If you prefer, you can turn off The power door locks can be manually locked from inside well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
the ultrasonic intrusion sensor when arming the the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door,
Vehicle Security system. To do so, push the lock button push the door lock knob on each door trim panel
 Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic 2
on the key fob three times within 15 seconds of arming transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
downward. To unlock each door, pull the door lock knob on
the system (while the Vehicle Security Light is flashing into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking brake,
each door trim panel upward.
rapidly). The vehicle will remain locked but will disable place the ignition in the OFF position, remove the key
the alarm in the case of repeated false alarms due to fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors, and lock
ambient conditions. your vehicle.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your  When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle injuries and death.
Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
Vehicle Security system. be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will Door Lock Knob not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or gear
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the selector.
exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound. If this If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system. door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
inside the vehicle before closing the door. a location accessible to children, and do not leave
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE NOTE: the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the could operate power windows, other controls, or
doors using the manual door lock. Security system.
move the vehicle.
POWER D OOR L OCKS KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —  If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
The power door lock switches are located on each door P ASSIVE E NTRY handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting
trim panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors. in a slower response time.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
 The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™.
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.  If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and
NOTE: (if equipped) will arm the Vehicle Security system.
 Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
Uconnect Settings Ú page 107. With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
 The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle. Grabbing
Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone, the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver door
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may automatically. Grabbing the passenger door handle will
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the unlock both doors automatically. The interior door panel
Power Door Lock Switch Passive Entry handle from locking/unlocking the lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is vehicle.
on, and either door is open, the power locks will not  Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the (low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps)
key fob in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF for whichever duration is set between 0, 30, 60
position, or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates
two flashes of the turn signals.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device, the wireless signal may get
blocked, and the driver’s door may not unlock
automatically.
If a door is open with the ignition either placed in the ACC
or ON/RUN (engine not running) position, a chime will Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
sound as a reminder.
NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:

 Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive Entry key
you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle, Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid fob in the trunk and try to close the deck lid, the deck lid
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The will automatically unlatch, unless another one of the
system Ú page 107. vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is outside the vehicle and
conditions are true: within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid.
 All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
 The doors are manually locked using the door lock To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
2
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting. knobs. With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)  Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the (1.5 m) of either door handle, pushing the Passive Entry
door panel switch and then the doors are closed. lock button will lock both doors.
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
 There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
door handle.
which will function if the ignition is in the OFF position.
To Enter The Trunk:
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle. With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck
lid, push the button located on the center of the light bar
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key which is located on the deck lid above the license plate.
fob while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the car, and it does
not detect any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, the
car will unlock and alert the customer.
Trunk Passive Entry Button

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door

handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — STEERING WHEEL
I F E QUIPPED
MANUAL T ILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when C OLUMN — IF E QUIPPED
the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
authorized dealer per written request of the customer. steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located
Please see an authorized dealer for service. below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK D OORS ON E XIT column.
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power

door locks if:
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking  The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 107.
NOTE:  The driver door is opened.
 After pushing the door handle button, you must wait  The doors were not previously unlocked.
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
NOTE:
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the  The doors will also unlock automatically when the gear
door handle, without the vehicle unlocking. selector was not previously in the PARK position, then
 The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob is placed into the PARK position.
battery is depleted.  Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob accordance with local laws. To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
interior door panel Ú page 284. steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering column. The heated steering wheel button is located within the
WARNING! Uconnect system. You can access the button through the
NOTE:
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. climate screen or the controls screen.
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, use
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving the key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door trim  Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to the heating element on.
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this  Press the heated steering wheel button a second time
warning may result in serious injury or death.
saved positions Ú page 27.
to turn the heating element off.
2
WARNING! NOTE:
POWER T ILT/T ELESCOPING STEERING Do not adjust the steering column while driving. The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel
to operate.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED with the steering column unlocked, could cause the For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this Ú page 18.
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the warning may result in serious injury or death.
steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering WARNING!
column control is located below the multifunction lever on
the steering column. HEATED S TEERING WHEEL —  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
I F E QUIPPED spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
The steering wheel contains a heating element
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
The heated steering wheel has only one
for long periods.
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an average of  Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
80 minutes before automatically shutting off. This time insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
will vary based on environmental temperatures. The wheel covers of any type and material. This may
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Control

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session
I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION  “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips Notice the visual cues that inform you of your VR system’s
you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Recognition (VR) system.
GET S TARTED
The Voice Recognition (VR) button is used to activate/
deactivate your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display  Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps
recognition.
menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C  Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
with 8.4-inch display system. straight ahead.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
The following Voice Commands can be given at any point
while using your Uconnect system.
 Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first Uconnect System Support: NOTE:
push the Voice Recognition (VR) button, wait until after  US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:  Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be
the beep, then say your Voice Command. 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week) linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
 You can interrupt the help message or system prompts  Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:  Be sure to program the radio presets prior to program-
by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 ming the memory settings.
from the current category. (French)
The memory settings switch is located on the driver’s door 2
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support: trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
 US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/  The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827 memory save function.
 Canadian residents visit https://www.driveucon-  The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call: of two saved memory profiles.
1-877-324-9091
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons Each memory profile saves desired position settings for
the following features:
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send Or
 Driver seat cushion
Receive A Text
 Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (if equipped)
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio,
Media, Navigation, And Climate Functions  Side mirrors
 Power tilt/telescoping steering column (if equipped)
 A set of desired radio station presets Memory Settings Switch
ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. Ú page 284.
PROGRAMMING T HE M EMORY FEATURE To program your key fobs, perform the following: NOTE:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the memory
To create a new memory profile, perform the following: settings are recalled when using Passive Entry to unlock
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
NOTE: the driver's door with a linked key fob.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected profile
from memory.
the set (S) button on the memory switch.
SEATS
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the
(2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will
(do not start the engine). vehicle.
display in the instrument cluster.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and WARNING!
within 10 seconds.
telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
station presets). NOTE: outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory settings these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
switch, and then push the desired memory button by pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing the killed.
(1 or 2) within five seconds. The instrument cluster unlock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.
display will display which memory position has been  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
set. MEMORY POSITION R ECALL that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
NOTE: NOTE: to be seriously injured or killed.
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile. message will be displayed in the instrument cluster  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
display. using a seat belt properly.
LINKING A ND U NLINKING T HE KEY F OB To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, push
T O MEMORY the desired memory button number (1 or 2) or the unlock
button on the key fob linked to the desired memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two position.
saved memory profiles.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
NOTE: buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
Before programming your key fobs you must select the canceled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one
“Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature through the second will occur before another recall can be selected.
Uconnect system Ú page 107.
MANUAL A DJUSTMENT Manual Front Seat Recline

(F RONT S EATS) — I F E QUIPPED To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
WARNING! the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
 Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is 2
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the Adjusting Bar Location
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
only when the vehicle is parked. Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward have latched. Recline Lever
Adjustment
WARNING! WARNING!
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a
bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.  Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
control which could cause a collision and serious a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
injury or death. could result in serious injury or death.
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS) WARNING!

 Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
WARNING!
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the position, the seat will not provide the proper stability
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision. latched seat could cause serious injury.
 The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
Folding Rear Seat seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously
additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the Folding Rear Seatback Loop Locations injured in a collision. Children should be seated and
upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or both using the proper restraint system.
seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when not in
use.
NOTE: POWER ADJUSTMENT (F RONT SEATS) —
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from I F E QUIPPED
the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an
extended period of time. This is normal and, by simply The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
unfolding the seats to the open position, over time the of the front seats. The power seat switches control the
seat cushion will return to its normal shape. movement of the seat. Vehicles equipped with power seat
controls will have a manual recline lever.
Folded Rear Seat

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy
Exit positions are stored in each memory setting profile
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down
Ú page 27.
using the power seat switch. The front of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch NOTE:
when the desired position has been reached. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled through
Power Lumbar — If Equipped the programmable features in the Uconnect system 2
Ú page 107.
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or On some models, the front seats may be equipped with
Power Seat Controls decrease the lumbar support. heaters located in the seat cushions and seatbacks.
1 — Power Seat Switch Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped WARNING!

2 — Power Lumbar Switch This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
3 — Manual Recline Lever enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
vehicle. spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you tion or other physical condition must exercise care
have the driver seat positioned when you place the when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position. at low temperatures, especially if used for long
using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the periods of time.
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the  When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
desired position has been reached. position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches  Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down by rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set posi- a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the tion when you place the vehicle’s ignition in the ACC or burns due to the increased surface temperature of
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the ON/RUN position. the seat.
desired position has been reached.  The Easy Entry/Exit feature is disabled when the driver
seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Front Heated Seats For information on use with the Remote Start system, see NOTE:
Ú page 18. The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can operate.
gain access to the control buttons through the WARNING! For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
climate screen and the controls screen.  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin Ú page 18.
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. The
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- VEHICLES W ITHOUT P ASSENGER
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, tion or other physical condition must exercise care SEATING I NSTALLED
and one for LO. Turning the heating elements off will when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
return the user to the radio screen. at low temperatures, especially if used for long All passenger occupants within the vehicle must be in a
periods of time. seat equipped with a Seat Belt System and Head Restraint
 Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting for the safety of the passenger. If the passenger and/or
on.  Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that rear seats have been removed, do not ride in those areas.
 Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in This vehicle has been designed to maximize total
LO setting on.
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious performance. In doing so, the deletion of passenger seats
 Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
burns due to the increased surface temperature of and/or rear seat may affect the Noise, Vibration, and
heating elements off.
the seat. Harshness (NVH) characteristics. As a result, the interior
NOTE: will be louder overall.
 Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes. FRONT VENTILATED S EATS — WARNING!
 The engine must be running for the heated seats to I F E QUIPPED  If the passenger and/or rear seats have been
operate. removed, do not ride in those areas. In a collision,
 If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto- The ventilated seats are equipped with fans people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately that can be controlled through the climate and ously injured or killed.
60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the control screen in the Uconnect system. The
display will change from HI to LO, indicating the fans operate at two speeds: HI and LO.  If this vehicle was not factory equipped with a
change. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically passenger seat, NEVER attempt to install a
 Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI. passenger seat because the safety systems,
after approximately 45 minutes.  Press the ventilated seat button a second time to including the air bags and seat belt, may not properly
choose LO. protect you.
 Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the
(Continued)
ventilated seat off.
WARNING!
PASSENGER S EAT E ASY ENTRY NOTE:
 The front passenger seat needs to slide back to a
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located
preset position for the fore/aft adjuster to be properly
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback
locked. For example, if the front passenger has the
this area are more likely to be seriously injured or and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily
seat adjusted full rear and exits the vehicle to let a rear
killed. remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and
allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows for
passenger enter using the easy entry handle, the fore/
aft adjuster needs to slide back about 2/3 of the way
2
 Only ride in available seating positions equipped with easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a
seat belt systems. Always properly wear your seat rearward to hit the lock position. If the adjuster is not
normal seating position, first return the seatback to its
belt. Failure to do so could result in an increased risk returned to this preset position, the seat will appear to
original recline location and then slide the entire seatback
of serious injury or death in the event of an accident. be loose.
to the preset lock position.
 If the front passenger uses the easy entry handle and
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and then lifts up the recliner handle without moving the
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the seatback to its original preset position, the recliner will
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not lock until it is moved to the full recline position.
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
Driver’s Side Easy Entry
tions to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash. The easy entry lever on the outboard side of the driver’s
seatback will dump the seatback forward to allow for
 All occupants, including the driver, should not easier access to the rear seats. The seat bottom will not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat if the head slide forward as the passenger side easy entry will. If
restraints are not in place of their proper positions in needed, use the driver’s side seat control to slide forward.
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash. To return the seat to the normal position, push the
seatback up and it will lock into the previously set recline
 Head restraints should never be adjusted while the Easy Entry Lever position. Then if needed, use the seat control to adjust the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head forward/rearward position.
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
HEAD R ESTRAINTS The RHR will automatically return to their normal position NOTE:
following a rear impact. If the RHR do not return to their It may be necessary to recline the front seat before
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by normal position, see an authorized dealer immediately. removing the head restraint to provide enough clearance
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. from the roof.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear. WARNING!
WARNING!  A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
 All occupants, including the driver, should not pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints in a location outside the occupant
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in compartment.
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.  ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
 Head restraints should never be adjusted while the previously described reinstallation instructions prior
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head Head Restraint to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a 1 — Release Button  Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
collision. 2 — Adjustment Button Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
3 — Seat Belt Loop players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a colli-
NOTE: sion and could result in serious injury or death.
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain addi- restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
tional clearance to the back of your head. button located at the base of the head restraint and push Rear Head Restraints
downward on the head restraint. The rear outboard head restraints are non-adjustable and
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
To remove the head restraint, remove the seat belt from are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with the seat belt loop. Raise the head restraint as far as it can movement in the event of a rear impact.
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear go. Then, push the adjustment button and the release
impact, the RHR will automatically extend forward button at the base of each post while pulling the head
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
head and the RHR. restraint posts into the holes while pushing the
adjustment button and release button. Then, adjust it to
the appropriate height.
MIRRORS I LLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS

To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR visors and lift the cover.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and 2
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE: Slide-On-Rod Extender
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when To use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s rear view. extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off rearward.
through the touchscreen. Illuminated Vanity Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod And Extender The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of the
Feature adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional NOTE:
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun. The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much
1. Fold down the sun visor. wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to
Automatic Dimming Mirror your vehicle.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window. WARNING!
CAUTION!
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun blockage.
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
mirror clean. object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
POWER M IRRORS HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED  The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the over-
head console or sunvisor designate the three different
The power mirror switch is located on the driver's side door These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. HomeLink® channels.
trim panel. This feature will be activated whenever you  To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped) programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, Ú page 45. activate the devices they are programmed to with each
push the mirror select button for the mirror that you want press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER  The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror
to move. (HOMELINK®) NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security system
is active Ú page 284.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING

HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended that a
new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying to
Power Mirror Control HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light program your HomeLink® button to.
1 — Left Mirror Selection Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
Use this QR code to access your digital
2 — Mirror Adjustment before you begin programming.
experience.
3 — Right Mirror Selection It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your
 HomeLink® replaces up to three
HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door
NOTE:
openers, motorized gates, lighting,
A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the
or home security systems. The
mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
HomeLink® unit is powered by your
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® NOTE: 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
C HANNELS normally use to operate the device. light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
To erase the channels, follow this procedure: Non-rolling Code Devices
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a NOTE:
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in 2
“TRAIN” button. before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final
and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the HomeLink® steps.
indicator light flashes.
PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE: GARAGE DOOR OPENER
Erasing all channels should only be performed when NOTE:
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final
channels when programming additional buttons. garage door opener motor, proceed as follows: step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
I DENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A NOTE:
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
R OLLING C ODE OR N ON-R OLLING C ODE procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
DEVICE programming additional buttons.
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink® 2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
buttons, you must determine whether the device has a 2. Place the garage door opener transmitter HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
rolling code or non-rolling code. 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener
button you wish to program, while keeping the motor operates, programming is complete.
Rolling Code Devices HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good 3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices program while you push and hold the garage door garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate. the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the device. The
button may not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly
by manufacturer.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps NOTE: Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans- transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
programming is complete. pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to designed to time-out in the same manner.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
be performed multiple times to successfully pair the process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
device to your HomeLink® buttons. door or gate motor.
the steps from the beginning.
REPROGRAMMING A S INGLE 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
WARNING! NOTE:
HOMELINK® B UTTON
 Your motorized door or gate will open and close while For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, place
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure while
not program the transmitter if people or pets are in previously trained, without erasing all the channels, programming HomeLink® with the engine on that your
the path of the door or gate. proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the new vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door
device you want to program the HomeLink® button to has remains open at all times.
 Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
confined area while programming the transmitter.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
starting the engine. program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until in view.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
can cause you and others to be severely injured or the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
killed. 20 seconds. Do not release the button. while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
“Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A Opener” and follow all remaining steps. indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
MISCELLANEOUS D EVICE CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
P ROGRAMMING rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
programming to a garage door opener Ú page 37. Be sure For programming transmitters in Canada/United States door may open and close while you are programming.
to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
code before beginning the programming process. several seconds of transmission: and observe the indicator light.
NOTE: TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS EXTERIOR LIGHTS

 If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
ming is complete and the garage door/device
are some of the most common solutions: HEADLIGHT SWITCH
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.  Replace the battery in the garage door opener The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
hand-held transmitter. instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
 To program the two remaining HomeLink®
 Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, 2
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
complete the training for a rolling code. instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
 Did you unplug the device for programming and lights (if equipped).
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for remember to plug it back in?
programming, plug it back in at this time.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
(Canadian/Gate Operator) HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps: WARNING!
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.  Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas can
Do not release the button. cause serious injury or death.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with  Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and you are programming the universal transmitter. Do Headlight Switch
follow all remaining steps. not program the transmitter if people, pets or other 1 — Rotate Headlight Control
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
SECURITY this transmitter with a garage door opener that has a
2 — Push Fog Light Control
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in 4 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
safety standards. This includes most garage door
your vehicle.
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for a garage door opener without these safety features.
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
NOTE:  If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was

For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be turned
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel on and off using the Uconnect system Ú page 107.
lights position to the first detent to turn the headlight  On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
switch to the AUTO position. Rotate to the second detent deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
to turn on headlights, parking lights, and instrument panel vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or
lights operation. on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning
lights are activated).
MULTIFUNCTION L EVER
HIGH/LOW B EAM SWITCH
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column. Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the
1 — Rotate Headlight Control multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.
2 — Push Fog Light Control AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAM HEADLAMP
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
CONTROL — I F EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating
NOTE: Multifunction Lever
high beam control through the use of a camera mounted
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific
light and automatically switches from high beams to low
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight I F E QUIPPED beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine NOTE:
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be is started and will remain on unless the headlamps are  The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged. turned to the on position, the parking brake is applied, or turned on or off using the Uconnect system
the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Ú page 107.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking NOTE:  Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel  For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position. lights are turned on. and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
 If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp PARKING LIGHTS HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See a local authorized To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights, To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight delay
dealer. rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the feature will leave the headlights on for up to 90 seconds.
parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O This delay is initiated when the ignition is placed in the OFF
FLASH-TO-P ASS (off) position. position while the headlight switch is on, and then the
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by NOTE: headlight switch is cycled off within 45 seconds. 2
Headlight delay can be canceled by either turning the
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
headlight switch on then off, or by placing the ignition in
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on, switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
the ON position.
until the lever is released. detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
NOTE: switch is placed in the parking lights position. However, NOTE:
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along  This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to pass
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be system Ú page 107.
position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams will
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
shut off.  If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS W ITH W IPERS will turn off in the normal manner.
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off

If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it LIGHTS-O N R EMINDER
also has this customer-programmable feature. When your
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle will chime when
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
position. the driver's door is opened.
system is on. This feature is programmable through the
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is Uconnect system Ú page 107.
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
FOG LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are The battery protection also includes the glove
on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An compartment light and the trunk light (if equipped).
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or indicator light located in the instrument cluster will To restore interior light operation after automatic battery
the low beam headlights, and push the fog light button on illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will protection is enabled (lights off), either place the ignition
the headlight switch. turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch.
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected. FRONT MAP/READING L IGHTS
TURN SIGNALS These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pushing the
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the lens. Push the lens a second time to turn off the light.
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when the
cluster flash to show proper operation. unlock button on the remote keyless entry key fob is
pushed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully
NOTE:
upward, to the second detent.
 If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
Fog Light Switch  A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Map/Reading Lights
INTERIOR LIGHTS AMBIENT LIGHT — I F EQUIPPED
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the of the floor and center console area.
OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were
turned on manually, or are on because a door is open.
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to DIMMER C ONTROLS Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle the O (off) position, and the interior lights will remain off
lights, map pocket lights, and ambient light located in the The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch and when the doors are open.
overhead console. are located on the left side of the instrument panel. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left first detent to brighten all text displays such as the
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio when the
instrument panel lights and illuminated cupholders (if parking lights or headlights are on. Rotating the 2
equipped). instrument panel dimmer control completely upward to
the second detent will turn on the interior lights. The
interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in
this position.
I LLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch
is placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
The courtesy lights will not turn off if the instrument panel
Instrument Panel Dimmer dimmer control is rotated upward to the second detent.
The courtesy lights will turn off after 10 minutes when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position to protect the battery.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
instrument panel dimmer control is rotated all the way
down to the O (off) position.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer

(Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Instrument Panel Dimmer (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wipers

Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
Mist
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST position
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the and release for a single wiping cycle. The wipers will
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. desired delay interval. There are four delay settings, which continue to operate until you release the multifunction
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of lever.
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ACC or one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36
ON/RUN position. NOTE:
seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
less.
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
Windshield Washers the windshield with washer fluid.
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward For information on wiper care and replacement, see
(toward the steering wheel) and hold. If the lever is pushed Ú page 236.
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and
operate for two cycles after the end of the lever is CAUTION!
released, and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected.  Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield
off position, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any
and then turn off. position other than off.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
 In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
1 — Push End Inward For Washer
WARNING! allow the wipers to return to the park position before
2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation And Mist turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield restarted.
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first defroster before and during windshield washer use.  Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper windshield wiper blades from returning to the off
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off
settings for high-speed wiper operation. and the blades cannot return to the off position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
RAIN SENSING W IPERS — I F EQUIPPED  Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition
is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position,
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this (5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the
feature. NEUTRAL position.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the  Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with 2
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. operational when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
Wiper delay position three should be used for normal rain
conditions.
NOTE:
CLIMATE CONTROLS Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
Climate Controls
 The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating MAX A/C Button
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
 The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio. Press and release the MAX A/C button on the
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the touchscreen to change the current setting to
windshield. AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator
 Use of products containing wax or silicone may reduce illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing and
Rain Sensing performance.
DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS releasing the button again will cause the MAX A/C
 The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off operation to exit.
using the Uconnect system Ú page 107. NOTE:
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
 Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

A/C Button The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for
the mode control selection. Continuous use of the best windshield and side window defrosting and
Press and release this button on the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button,
touchscreen, or push the button on the window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is the climate system will return to the previous setting.
faceplate to change the current setting. not recommended. Recirculation mode may automatically
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. adjust to optimize customer experience for warming,
Rear Defrost Button
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to cooling, dehumidification, etc. Press and release the Rear Defrost button on
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to the touchscreen, or push and release the
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging window defroster and the heated outside
cabin. on the inside of the windshield. mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
NOTE: AUTO Button window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
 If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO.
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if CAUTION!
AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired
needed.
temperature by automatically adjusting the Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
 If your air conditioning performance seems lower than blower speed and air distribution. Air
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser the heating elements:
Conditioning (A/C) may be active during AUTO operation to
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of improve performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended  Use care when washing the inside of the rear
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the for efficiency. You can press and release this button on the window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
front of the radiator and through the condenser. touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to turn interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
Recirculation Button AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
Press and release this button on the with warm water.
between manual mode and automatic modes Ú page 48.
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the system between Front Defrost Button  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
recirculation mode and outside air mode. The window cleaners on the interior surface of the
Press and release the Front Defrost button on window.
Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
the touchscreen, or push and release the
when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
button on the faceplate, to change the current  Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air
can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be
comes from the windshield and side window demist
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
level may increase.
the windshield.
Driver And Passenger Up And Down Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch Bi-Level Mode
to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using
Buttons either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with buttons on the touchscreen. and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
independent temperature control. directed through the defrost and side window
Faceplate demister outlets.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control NOTE: 2
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
temperature bar towards the red arrow button Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
on the touchscreen for warmer temperature provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
counterclockwise.
settings. from the floor outlets.
Touchscreen
Push the blue button on the faceplate or Floor Mode
touchscreen or press and slide the Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
temperature bar towards the blue arrow on the
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar amount of air is directed through the defrost
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
area between the icons. and side window demister outlets.
SYNC Button
Mode Control
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to Mix Mode
toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC Change the airflow distribution mode by
pressing one of the Mode buttons on the Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
indicator is illuminated when SYNC is on. SYNC
touchscreen. The airflow distribution mode can side window demister outlets. This setting
is used to synchronize the passenger
be adjusted so air comes from the instrument works best in cold or snowy conditions that
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist require extra heat to the windshield. This
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
outlets. setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
moisture on the windshield.
NOTE: Panel Mode
Climate Control OFF Button
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen. Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually Press and release this button to turn the
Blower Control Climate Control ON/OFF.
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
of air forced through the Climate Control be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
system. There are seven blower speeds direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
available. vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL Manual Operation Override Winter Operation

(ATC) This system offers a full complement of manual override To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be performance, make sure the engine cooling system is
Automatic Operation turned off when the system is being used in the manual functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
mode. concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep Vacation/Storage
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of the when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of
desired temperature is displayed, the system will following commands: time, see Ú page 269.
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort  “Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
level. Window Fogging
 “Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
TIP: and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
not necessary to change the settings. You will
Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
the system to function automatically.
will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel periods, as fogging may occur.
NOTE: if equipped.
Outside Air Intake
 It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for OPERATING T IPS Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
comfort as quickly as possible. control settings for various weather conditions. collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water
 The temperature can be displayed in US or Metric units Summer Operation drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 107.
The engine cooling system must be protected with a of ice, slush, and snow.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Cabin Air Filter INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT Console Features

The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen The center console has a storage compartment located
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your STORAGE underneath the armrest. The compartment contains a
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed. 12 Volt power outlet, and is also equipped with a USB port
Glove Compartment featuring active charging, which will continue charging
Operating Tips Chart
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side your device up to 60 minutes after the ignition is placed in 2
of the instrument panel. the OFF position. The USB port also may be equipped with
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS an IPOD®/USB control Ú page 50, or Apple CarPlay® and
Set the mode control to Android Auto™ Ú page 144.
(Panel Mode), (MAX A/C) on,
Hot Weather And and blower on high. Roll down
Vehicle Interior Is the windows for a minute to flush
Very Hot out the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to achieve
comfort.
Turn (A/C)
Warm Weather on and set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Glove Compartment
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle. Center Console
Set the mode control to
Cool & Humid
Conditions (Mix Mode) and turn (A/C) on WARNING!
to keep windows clear.
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
Set the mode control to lid in the open position. Driving with the console
(Floor Mode). If windshield compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
Cold Weather
fogging starts to occur, move the
control to (Mix Mode).
I LLUMINATED CUPHOLDERS — Power outlets labeled with a key symbol can be powered
when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, while
I F EQUIPPED the outlets labeled with a battery symbol are connected
directly to the battery and powered at all times.
The front cupholders are equipped with a light ring that
illuminates the cupholders for the front passengers. The These power outlets can also operate a conventional cigar
light ring is controlled by the dimmer control Ú page 43. lighter unit.
The front power outlet is located next to the storage area
on the integrated center stack of the instrument panel.
USB/AUX Ports
1 — USB 1 Port
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB 2 Port
NOTE:
Light Ring In Front Cupholder Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB/AUX C ONTROL USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen that Power Outlet — Integrated Center Stack Front
Located in the front storage area of the center console, the device is not supported by the system.
NOTE:
this feature allows an external USB device to be
connected to the audio system.
ELECTRICAL P OWER OUTLETS The front integrated center stack power outlet can be
changed from switched ignition powered to battery
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power powered by moving the integrated center stack fuse
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features, outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small #12 in the Rear Power Distribution Center from fuse
if equipped electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. location “IGN” to “B+” Ú page 242.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
In addition to the front center stack power outlet, there is

also a power outlet located in the center console to the left CAUTION!
of the media hub.  Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W
(13 Amp) at 12 Volts. If the 160 W (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
2
 Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
 Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Integrated Center from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use
Stack (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in
Power Outlet — Center Console 2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
NOTE: engine from starting.
All accessories connected to these powered outlets WARNING!  Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in
use to protect the battery against discharge. To avoid serious injury or death: vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
 Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet tently and with greater caution.
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
 After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
 Do not touch with wet hands. periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
 Close the lid when not in use and while driving the sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
vehicle. sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.  Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
WINDOWS WARNING! WIND B UFFETING

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
POWER W INDOW CONTROLS Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
The window switches on the driver's door control all the the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
door windows. accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence
or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows open, partially close the windows to minimize the
windows while operating the power window switches. buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or
open any window.
Automatic Window Features POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The driver and, in some models, passenger power window The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window visors on the overhead console.
switch to the second detent, release, and the window will
go down automatically.
Power Window Switches To open the window part way, push the window switch to
The passenger door window can also be operated by using the first detent and release it when you want the window
the single window controls on the passenger door trim to stop.
panel. The window controls will operate only when the To stop the window from going all the way down during the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
NOTE: Anti-Pinch Protect
The power window switches will remain active for up to When closing the windows, this feature will detect any
10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. obstruction in the path of the window and will
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this
timing is programmable within Uconnect Settings occurs. Power Sunroof Switch
Ú page 107.
1 — Sunroof Close Switch
2 — Sunroof Open Switch
3 — Vent Switch
Push the switch forward and release it within one second NOTE:
WARNING! and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch
 Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with During Express Open or Express Close operation, any Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key other movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible sunroof.
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle SUNSHADE OPERATION
equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or
Manual Open/Close 2
Push and hold the switch rearward, the sunroof and The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unat- sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
tended children, can become entrapped by the sunshade will open and automatically stop at full open
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof position. NOTE:
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury Push and hold the switch forward and the sunroof will The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
or death. close from any position and stop at a full closed position.
SUNROOF M AINTENANCE
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown Any release of the switch during open or close operation
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain in Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat a partially opened position until the switch is operated and the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any
belt properly and make sure all passengers are also held again. debris that may have collected in the tracks.
properly secured. Venting The Sunroof I GNITION OFF OPERATION
 Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Push and release the Vent switch within one second and
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any the sunroof will open to the vent position. During Express The power sunroof switch can remain active in Accessory
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury Vent operation, any other actuation of the sunroof Delay for up to approximately 10 minutes after the
may result. switches will stop the sunroof operation. vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
PINCH PROTECT F EATURE — NOTE:
OPENING A ND CLOSING THE SUNROOF I F E QUIPPED This feature is programmable using the Uconnect system
Express Open/Close Ú page 107.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
Push the switch rearward and release it within one sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an
second, the sunroof and sunshade will open automatically obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
and stop at full open position. sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction
if this occurs.
HOOD WARNING!
OPENING T HE HOOD Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
To open the hood, two latches must be released. when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath the Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
driver’s side of the instrument panel. injury or death.
TRUNK
Hood Safety Catch Location OPENING T HE TRUNK
NOTE: The trunk may be opened in several ways:
 Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must  Power trunk release button on the instrument panel
be in PARK.  Trunk button on the key fob
 While lifting the hood, use both hands.  Trunk Passive Entry button Ú page 22
 Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are  External release switch located on the underside of the
not in motion and not in the lifted position. trunk lid overhang
Hood Release Lever
CLOSING THE H OOD NOTE:
2. Reach under the hood, push the safety catch to the The release feature will function only when the vehicle is
left and lift the hood. In one continuous motion, pull down on the front edge of unlocked.
the hood with moderate force until the angle is below the
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the trunk open
crossover point (where the gas props are no longer
symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that
resisting) and let the hood continue to fall closed from its
the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once
own inertia.
the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the trunk open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Power Trunk Release Button CLOSING THE T RUNK WARNING!

The trunk can be opened from inside the
vehicle using the power trunk release button With one or more hands placed on the outside trunk Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either
located on the instrument panel to the left of surface push the trunk lid down until you hear the trunk by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the
the steering wheel. lock latch into place. inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when
NOTE: NOTE: your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young
2
Before closing the trunk lid, make sure your key fob is not children may not be able to escape, even if they entered
The automatic transmission must be in PARK before the
inside the trunk area. The trunk will latch then automati- through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children
button will operate. For manual transmissions, the vehicle
cally unlock if the key fob is detected, not allowing the key can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
must be in NEUTRAL.
fob to be locked in the trunk area.
Key Fob Trunk Release Button
Push the power trunk button on the key fob TRUNK SAFETY CARGO A REA FEATURES
twice within five seconds to release the trunk.
Trunk Emergency Release Cargo Net — If Equipped
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release The rear cargo area may be equipped with a cargo net to
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the keep items secure while driving.
Passive Entry Button
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
Push the trunk Passive Entry button which is located on To attach the cargo net, the clips must be hooked through
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
the back of the trunk lid. With a valid Passive Entry key fob the loops on both sides of the cargo area.
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the trunk, push the Passive Entry
button to open the trunk.
Trunk Emergency Release
Trunk Passive Entry Button

56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 57
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS WARNING!

NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the
Use this QR code to access your digital A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others ignition is first cycled.
experience. could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
1. Tachometer recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
 Indicates the engine speed in your vehicle overheats Ú page 237.
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
revolutions per minute (RPM x display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
1000). the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
2. Instrument Cluster Display CAUTION! activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles, 3
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this display Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster
shows the instrument cluster display messages your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull display is designed to display important information about
Ú page 57. over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into interactive display located on the instrument panel, your
3. Speedometer instrument cluster display can show you how systems are
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,”
 Indicates vehicle speed. turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized working and give you warnings when they are not. The
dealer for service. steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
4. Temperature Gauge
through the main menus and submenus. You can access
 The temperature gauge shows engine coolant the specific information you want and make selections
temperature. Any reading within the normal range 5. Fuel Gauge and adjustments.
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
ating satisfactorily. when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
 The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher ON/RUN position.
temperature when driving in hot weather, up  The fuel pump symbol points to the
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It side of the vehicle where the fuel door
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits is located.
of the normal operating range.
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LOCATION AND CONTROLS Speedometer Vehicle Info

Performance — Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
If Equipped Using the up or down arrow button allows you to
The instrument cluster display features an interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster. Driver Assist — cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Fuel Economy Trip
If Equipped Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title area.
Audio Messages Screen Setup Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Diagnostics —
Using the left or right arrow button allows you to
If Equipped
cycle through the submenu items of the Main menu item.
The system allows the driver to select information by

NOTE:
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering  Holding the up or down or left or
wheel:
right arrow button will loop the user through the
currently selected menu or options presented on the
screen.
 Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls screen viewed within that main menu will be displayed.
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen OK Button:
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls For Digital Speedometer:
 Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or km/h).
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a For Screen Setup:
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow buttons
located on the left side of the steering wheel. The  OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
instrument cluster display menu items may consist of the  Within each submenu layer, the up and down
following: Instrument Cluster Display Controls arrow buttons will allow the user to select the item of
1 — Left Arrow Button interest.
2 — Up Arrow Button  Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
3 — Right Arrow Button
the first page of the submenu).
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button  Pushing the left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and Performance Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
Timers) — If Equipped: Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
 Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK for the following procedure(s): START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
button. 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
Use this QR code to access your digital 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
experience. START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
Oil Change Required
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
OFF position. 3
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access
Your vehicle is equipped with an
the ”Oil Life” screen.
NOTE:
engine oil change indicator system. If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
The “Oil Change Required” message 4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset.
will display in the instrument cluster conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display If necessary, repeat this procedure.
display for five seconds after a single will update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil pop-up message of "To reset oil life engine must be PERFORMANCE S HIFT INDICATOR
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is off with ignition in run” will be displayed (for five
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil Life
(PSI) — I F EQUIPPED
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal screen. The PSI is enabled on vehicles with manual transmission,
driving style. or when a vehicle with automatic transmission is in
5. Push and release the up or down arrow button
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each manual shift mode. The PSI provides the driver with a
to return to previous main menu.
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn visual indication within the instrument cluster display
off the message temporarily, push and release the OK or NOTE: when the driver configured gear shift point has been
arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator system If the indicator message illuminates when you start the reached and the driver is still accelerating. This indication
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If notifies the driver to change gear corresponding to the
the following procedure. necessary, repeat this procedure. configured RPMs in the head unit.
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire Performance Features
Pressure System” is displayed.
SELECTABLE MENU ITEMS Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be WARNING!
reset Ú page 168.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the Coolant Temp Performance Features is intended for off-highway or
instrument cluster display.  Displays the actual coolant temperature. track use only and should not be done on any public
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired. roadways. It is recommended that these features be
Trans Temp
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
Speedometer  Displays the actual transmission temperature. of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
Oil Temp by the performance pages must never be exploited in a
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
 Displays the actual oil temperature. reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the speedometer menu is displayed in the instrument
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
cluster display. Push and release the OK button to toggle Oil Pressure attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
units (km/h or mph) of the speedometer.  Displays the actual oil pressure.
Vehicle Info Oil Life
Push and release the up or down arrow button until To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the OK button. The the Performance menu is displayed in the instrument
the “Vehicle Info” menu is displayed in the instrument “Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be displayed at all
times, but the following conditions will need to be met in cluster display. Push the right or left arrow button to
cluster display. Push and release the right or left order to reset Oil Life: enter the submenus.
arrow button to scroll through the submenus items of
 The vehicle must be off The Performance Features include the following:
“Vehicle Info.” Follow the directional prompts to access or
reset any of the following “Vehicle Info” submenu items:  The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position  0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Timer
Tire Pressure Monitor If the conditions are met, holding the OK button will reset  Best
the gauge and the numeric display will return to 100%.  Last
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the If the conditions are not met, a pop-up message will  Recent
ICON. display for 5 seconds, describing the required conditions,
and then the Oil Life screen will reappear.  Reaction Timer
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To XX”  0-100 mph (0-160 km/h) Timer
is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire pressure Battery Voltage
values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value  Best
 Displays the actual battery voltage.
of the low tire are displayed in a different color than the All Wheel Drive (AWD) Status — If Equipped  Last
other tire pressure value.  Recent
 Displays the status of the All - Wheel Drive system.
 Reaction Timer
 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the steering Fuel Economy
 Best wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display: Two submenu pages; one with Current Value
 Last (instantaneous calculation of the fuel economy) displayed
Adaptive Cruise Control Off and one without the Current Value displayed (toggle the
 Recent
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive left or right arrow button to select one):
 Reaction Timer Cruise Control Off.”
 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer  Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L).
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready  Range To Empty (miles or km).
 Best
 Last
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has  Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L). 3
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise  The Max and Min values will correspond to the
 Recent Control Ready.” particular engine requirements.
 Reaction Timer Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering  Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber color
wheel) and the following will display in the instrument and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
 Braking Distance
cluster display:  Hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy
 Distance information.
ACC SET
 From Speed
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the Trip Info
 Current G-Forces instrument cluster.
 Peak G-Forces Push and release the up or down arrow button until
If the Driver Assist main menu is not selected, an ACC the Trip Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster
 Lap Timer pop-up message may display if any ACC activity occurs,
 Lap History display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to
which may include any of the following:
select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the
 Will list the last five laps with the best lap high-  Distance Setting Change following:
lighted in green.
 System Cancel
 Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
 Top Speed  Driver Override for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
The following describes each feature and its operation:  System Off  Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
Driver Assist — If Equipped  ACC Proximity Warning economy (MPG, L/100km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip B
 ACC Unavailable Warning since the last reset.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will return to the last  Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC display selected after five seconds of no ACC display since the last reset.
system settings. The information displayed depends on activity Ú page 85. Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
ACC system status.
Audio Upper Right

Gear Display
This menu displays the Audio information of the currently  Full
Compass -  Single
playing audio source (e.g. FM radio). Outside Temp Time
If Equipped
Restore Defaults
Messages Average (MPG, Current (MPG,
 Restore
This feature shows the number of stored warning Range to Empty L/100 km, or L/100 km, or
km/L) km/L)  Cancel
messages, if any. Pushing the right or left arrow
button will allow you to scroll through the stored Trip A Distance Trip B Distance None BATTERY SAVER O N/BATTERY S AVER
messages.
MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL L OAD
Screen Setup
Center REDUCTION ACTIONS — I F EQUIPPED
Compass - This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument cluster Menu Title Outside Temp
If Equipped (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
display. Push and release the OK button to enter the
Average (MPG, system and status of the vehicle battery.
submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the instrument Time Range to Empty L/100 km, or In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
cluster as well as the location that information is km/L) the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
displayed. load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
Current (MPG,
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
NOTE: L/100 km, or Trip A Distance Trip B Distance
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Based upon equipment options and current vehicle km/L)
status, some of the features may not be available. Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
Audio
Digital Speed None It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
Information
Upper Left depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
Compass - Current Gear drive cycle.
Outside Temp Time
If Equipped
 On When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Average (MPG, Current (MPG,  Off Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
Range to Empty L/100 km, or L/100 km, or instrument cluster.
km/L) km/L) Odometer
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
 Show
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance None state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at
 Hide
a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:  The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time

(weeks, months).
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
 The charging system is independent from load reduc-
 The battery was recently replaced and was not charged The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
completely. instrument panel together with a dedicated message
charging system continuously.
 The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications
 If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
when the vehicle was parked. are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
a problem with the charging system Ú page 64.
 The battery was used for an extended period with the considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to
reduction:
+12 Volts portable appliances like vacuum cleaners,
game consoles and similar devices. the information in this chapter in the event of a failure 3
 Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
 Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped The system check menu may appear different based upon
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
 Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors Mode”)
telltales are optional and may not appear.
 HVAC System During a trip:
 115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
 Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible: RED WARNING LIGHTS
 Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
 Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior) Air Bag Warning Light
following conditions:  Check what may be plugged in to power outlets This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
+12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
 The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical  Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature) eight seconds as a bulb check when the
loads are larger than the capability of the charging  Check the audio settings (volume) ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
system. The charging system is still functioning prop- RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime
After a trip: when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay
erly.
 Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads  Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, and Ignition Off Draw currents). possible.
towing, frequent stopping).  Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
 Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec- time and parking time).
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar  The vehicle should have service performed if the
devices. message is still present during consecutive trips and
 Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
parking periods). help to identify the cause.
Brake Warning Light Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

WARNING!
This warning light monitors various brake This warning light indicates when the driver or
functions, including brake fluid level and Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
parking brake application. If the brake light dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Ú page 172.
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate Battery Charge Warning Light
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake repair to the ABS system is required.
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. This warning light will illuminate when the
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake while the engine is running, there may be a
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for malfunction with the charging system. Contact
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic inspected by an authorized dealer. system or a related component.
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is The light also will turn on when the parking brake is Door Open Warning Light
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has This indicator will illuminate when a door is
dropped below a specified level. NOTE: ajar/open and not fully closed.
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
does not show the degree of brake application.
NOTE: NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault NOTE: Trunk Open Warning Light
Warning Light This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is
are pressed at the same time. open and not fully closed.
This warning light will turn on when there's a
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
fault with the EPS system Ú page 83.
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing.
NOTE:
The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
WARNING! ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly Oil Pressure Warning Light 3
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be starting, have the system checked by an authorized
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
obtained as soon as possible. dealer.
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning soon as possible, and contact an authorized
Light dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
Warning Light This warning light warns of an overheated
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
engine condition. If the engine coolant
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
temperature is too high, this indicator will
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the Oil Temperature Warning Light
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime
will either stay on or flash depending on the This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
cool, whichever comes first.
is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn temperature to return to normal levels.
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle
service as soon as possible. the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service Ú page 218.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer Warning Light — If Equipped miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle This light will turn on when a ACC is not (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible
and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the operating and needs service Ú page 85. to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to  The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light
drive normally. come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
WARNING!  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
Light
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
If you continue operating the vehicle when the This warning light monitors the ABS. The light when ESC becomes inactive.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated will turn on when the ignition is placed in the  This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may event.
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a stay on for as long as four seconds.
fire. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not Warning Light — If Equipped
functioning and service is required as soon as possible. This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
CAUTION! However, the conventional brake system will continue to
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
also on.
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe if it was turned off previously.
transmission damage or transmission failure. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake Low Fuel Warning Light
system inspected by an authorized dealer. When the fuel level reaches approximately 2
Vehicle Security Warning Light — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime will
If Equipped sound. The light will remain on until fuel is
Warning Light — If Equipped added.
This light will flash at a fast rate for
This warning light will indicate when the ESC Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the
security system is arming, and then will flash This warning light will illuminate when the
instrument cluster will come on when the
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed. windshield washer fluid is low.
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out
with the engine running.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
WARNING!
If Equipped Warning Light
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
This warning light will illuminate when the fuel temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This The warning light switches on and a message is
filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
disengage the light. If the light does not turn flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, lower than the recommended value and/or
off, please see an authorized dealer. cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator injury to the driver, occupants or others.
be guaranteed.
Warning Light (MIL) Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
3
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light previously, the display will show the indications
CAUTION!
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System corresponding to each tire.
called OBD II that monitors engine and Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
automatic transmission control systems. (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control CAUTION!
This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the system. It also could affect fuel economy and
ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to converter damage and power loss will soon occur. handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. Immediate service is required. avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped possible.
through several typical driving styles. In most situations, This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. Drive (AWD) system is not functioning properly Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
and that service is required. Contact an checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
authorized dealer. pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
Light — If Equipped on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
possible if this occurs.
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
fault in the Forward Collision Warning System. those tires.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 167.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
Target Vehicle Indicator Light —
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper CAUTION! If Equipped
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire This will display the distance setting for the ACC
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. The TPMS has been optimized for the original
system when the system is engaged
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size Ú page 85.
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability. equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
operation or sensor damage may result when using Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
Target Vehicle Indicator Light —
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may If Equipped
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
low tire pressure telltale. This will display when the ACC is set and the
sensor to become inoperable. After using an vehicle in front is detected Ú page 85.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is sensor function checked.
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for This indicator light will illuminate when the
approximately one minute and then remain continuously YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS parking lights or headlights are turned on
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent Ú page 39.
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may Indicator Light — If Equipped
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of This indicator light will illuminate when the
Forward Collision Warning is off.
reasons, including the installation of replacement or front fog lights are on Ú page 39.
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
independently and the corresponding exterior This indicator light will illuminate when the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be cruise control is ready, but not set Ú page 84.
control systems. When these systems are operating
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
(left) or up (right).
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
NOTE: Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready current government regulations.
3
 A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven Indicator Light — If Equipped If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
This light will turn on when ACC has been
 Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi- also store diagnostic codes and other information to
turned on, but is not set Ú page 85.
cator flashes at a rapid rate. assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
This light will turn on when ECO mode is active.
Refer to the Drive modes Supplement for
BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS
CAUTION!
further information. High Beam Indicator Light  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate damage to the emission control system. It could also
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — that the high beam headlights are on. With the affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
If Equipped low beams activated, push the multifunction must be serviced before any emissions tests can be
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to performed.
This indicator light will illuminate when the turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
cruise control is set to the desired speed rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
Ú page 84. high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Sport Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped scenario.
This light will turn on when Sport mode is

active.
Refer to the Drive Modes Supplement for
further information.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a connection return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an the ignition or start the engine. This means that
port to allow access to information related to the
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you
performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. should not proceed to the I/M station.
service technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and For states that require an Inspection and  The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
emissions system Ú page 106. Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning tion or start the engine. This means that your
WARNING! and is not on when the engine is running, and vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can
that the OBD II system is ready for testing. proceed to the I/M station.
 ONLY an authorized service technician should Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery
vehicle. recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
 If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you update. A recheck with the previously mentioned test
device, it may: can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.
 Be possible that vehicle systems, including vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
safety related systems, could be impaired or a 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
loss of vehicle control could occur that may not crank or start the engine. operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
result in an accident involving serious injury or going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
death.
NOTE:
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this
 Access, or allow others to access, information test over.
stored in your vehicle systems, including
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
personal information.
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
71
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE MANUAL T RANSMISSION — IF E QUIPPED Tip Start Feature — Automatic
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in
Transmission
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting Place the ignition in the START position and release it as
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking the starter engages. The starter motor will automatically
belts. ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is disengage itself once engine is running. If the engine fails
pressed to the floor. to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
WARNING! seconds. If this occurs:
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 4
 When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in OFF position, remove the key fob from the
I F E QUIPPED 2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
vehicle and lock the vehicle. The gear selector must be in the PARK position before you 3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a any driving gear. NORMAL STARTING
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally CAUTION!
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the START/STOP Button — Manual
 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear vehicle has come to a complete stop. Transmission Only
selector.
1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pushing and
 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
a location accessible to children), and do not leave 2. Release the ENGINE START/STOP button when the
the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter  Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is engine starts. If the vehicle fails to start within 10
‘n Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could firmly pressing the brake pedal. seconds, release the ENGINE START/STOP button,
operate power windows, other controls, or move the wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
vehicle. Starting” procedure.
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
72 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to 3. Place the gear selector in FIRST gear or REVERSE and If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
the engine starting, release the ENGINE START/STOP then apply the parking brake. START/STOP button is pushed once, the instrument
button. cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message
NOTE: and the engine will remain running. Never leave a
NOTE:  If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF posi- NOTE:
pedal. tion. If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not
running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE  If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
START/STOP Button — Automatic inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.
inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and
Transmission Only the engine is not running. AUTOPARK
1. The transmission must be in PARK.  If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with placing
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
seconds or three short pushes in a row before the the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be
3. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage remain in the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped, relied upon as the primary method by which the driver
automatically after 10 seconds. placed in park and the button is pushed twice to the shifts the vehicle into PARK.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to OFF position. The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE outlined on the following pages.
button again.
START/STOP Button — Automatic
NOTE: WARNING!
Transmission Only
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is  Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
pedal. release the ENGINE START/STOP button. your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position. blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
To Turn Off The Engine The Using ENGINE
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE display and on the gear selector. If the “P” indicator
START/STOP Button — Manual is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
Transmission Only three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed precaution, always apply the parking brake when
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. exiting the vehicle.
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, then push and release the ENGINE The ignition will remain in the ACC position until the (Continued)
START/STOP button. gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed
twice to the OFF position.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 73
WARNING!
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to EXTENDED P ARK S TARTING
Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
 AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not NOTE: NOTE:
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear selector been started or driven for at least 30 days.
relied upon as the primary method by which the must be returned to “P” to select desired gear. 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK. battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may
AutoPark. crank cycle.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph 2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark. (1.9 km/h) or less. when the engine starts. For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
ignition systems, press and hold the brake pedal
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met: The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P” will while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. 4
 Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is
above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). 3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
 Vehicle is not in PARK
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the “Extended
 Ignition switched from RUN to ACC WARNING!
Park Starting” procedure.
NOTE: If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the 4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the procedure.
position. After 30 minutes, the ignition switches to OFF the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution,
automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition switch always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
CAUTION!
OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark. continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait
by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster display and
10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met: on the gear selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
 Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
 Vehicle is not in PARK
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
 Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
 Driver’s door is ajar
 Brake pedal is not pressed
I F ENGINE F AILS T O S TART CAUTION!

The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory are high-quality and
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should
“Normal Starting” and the vehicle has not experienced an crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions
extended park condition as defined previously, it may be Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. under which vehicle operations will occur. For the
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor recommended viscosity and quality grades Ú page 278.
and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
10 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the COLD WEATHER OPERATION CAUTION!
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON/RUN
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the (B ELOW –22°F OR −30°C) Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
“Normal Starting” procedure. the engine or damage may result.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater
WARNING! (available from an authorized dealer) is recommended. NOTE:
 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
AFTER S TARTING thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
serious personal injury. preted as an indication of difficulty. Please check your oil
decrease as the engine warms up.
level with the engine oil indicator often during the break in
 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it period. Add oil as required.
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans- ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the 3.6L & 5.7L PARKING BRAKE
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
and vehicle. brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
 If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster vehicle. PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position.
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). When the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or is in the ON/RUN position, the Brake Warning Light in the
start can be dangerous if done improperly 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. instrument cluster will illuminate.
Ú page 216.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
NOTE:
WARNING!
 When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will  Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
before attempting to move the vehicle. possible injury or damage.
 This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.  When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
It does not show the degree of brake application. from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before Parking Brake Release be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a 4
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the parking gear selector.
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
brake, firmly push the parking brake pedal fully. To release
vehicle.  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal a second
Manual Transmission — If Equipped keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove
time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle. location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
Parking Brake
WARNING! CAUTION!
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before  Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
a collision. partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch Ú page 162.
 Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or  Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor may
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll damage to the clutch and transmission.
and cause damage or injury.
 Do not rest your hand on the gear selector while
driving, as this may result in transmission synchro- Manual Gear Selector
nizer damage.
CAUTION!
 Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
SHIFTING
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
brake released, a brake system malfunction is to the transmission may occur. accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
authorized dealer immediately. to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not fully
NOTE: press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator pedal
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort when shifting.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is
normal.
6-SPEED M ANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
Shift Pattern
The 6-speed manual transmission has a spring that Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively steady This occurs when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher
centers the gear selector near THIRD and FOURTH gear. speeds) may result in increased fuel economy. than 106°F (41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph
This spring helps you know which gear you are in when you Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired (30 km/h) but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from FIRST to acceleration rate. transmission is in FIRST gear, and the accelerator is at ¼
SECOND or downshifting from SIXTH to FIFTH. throttle or less.
NOTE:
The spring will try to pull the gear selector toward THIRD After you shift the transmission to FOURTH gear, you can
and FOURTH gear. Make sure you move the gear selector  Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear.
into SECOND or FIFTH gear. If you let the gear selector inhibitor system. Always press the clutch pedal fully to
move in the direction of the pulling, you may end shifting the floor before shifting into REVERSE. When vehicle DOWNSHIFTING
from FIRST to FOURTH or from SIXTH to THIRD gear. speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse
inhibitor activates to help prevent shifts into REVERSE. To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downshift
to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep grade.
CAUTION! When at a complete stop, you may notice lighter shift
efforts into REVERSE with the ignition switch in the ON
4
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete stop position (RUN position for Keyless Enter ‘n Go™), as WARNING!
before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so may compared to the ignition LOCK position (OFF position Skipping more than one gear while downshifting, could
result in transmission damage. for Keyless Enter ‘n Go™). This is normal operation of cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You could have
the transmission reverse inhibitor system. a collision.
You must always use FIRST gear (or REVERSE) when  Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
starting from a standing position. you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with
CAUTION!
RECOMMENDED S HIFT SPEEDS the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may
also be heard when driving at low engine RPM. Also,  If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel this may be more noticeable when the transmission is downshift at too high an engine speed, you could
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recommended warm. This is a normal condition and is not an indica- damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
shift speed chart. tion of a problem with your clutch or transmission.
 Do not downshift into FIRST gear when the vehicle is
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT 1–4 S KIP SHIFT moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could
SPEEDS damage the engine and/or clutch.
In Auto Drive Mode, Default, or Street Drive Modes, there
Axle are times when you must shift the transmission directly
1-4 4-5 5-6
Ratio from FIRST gear to FOURTH gear instead of from FIRST
gear to SECOND gear. This is to help you get the best
mph 20 37 48
3.90 possible fuel economy from your vehicle.
km/h 32 59 77
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — WARNING! WARNING!

IF EQUIPPED  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is a location accessible to children), and do not leave
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
of PARK. accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could could operate power windows, other controls, or
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some- move the vehicle.
WARNING! thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
 Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully pedal. CAUTION!
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle  Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure  Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
movement and possible injury or damage. those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you vehicle has come to a complete stop.
 Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a  Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition  Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
PARK before exiting the vehicle. OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the firmly pressing the brake pedal.
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle against unwanted movement.
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni- I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This helps the
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle. access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
(Continued) be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned OFF position.
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the NOTE:
transmission gear selector.
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition
(Continued) is in the ACC position (even though the engine will be off).
Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition
is OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE TRANSMISSION S HIFT The electronically controlled transmission adapts its shift NOTE:
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM and road conditions. REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds the Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position (beside
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. the DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the
applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster
must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. between these gears. (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the gear selector to the right
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE,
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is and NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions.
stopped or moving at low speeds. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift Gear Ranges
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward
8-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
4
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
The transmission gear range is displayed both on the gear DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear,
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster NOTE:
range, push the lock button on the gear selector and move Ú page 82. After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
the selector rearward or forward. To shift the transmission selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe-
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake cially important when the engine is cold.
pedal must be pressed. You must also press the brake
pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when PARK (P)
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
DRIVE range for normal driving. transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE:
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
 The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; there- range.
fore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be some-
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
what abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
(kilometers). Automatic Transmission Gear Selector downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
 In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indi-
cator will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift
can be completed.
When exiting the vehicle, always:

WARNING! CAUTION!
 Apply the parking brake.
 Shift the transmission into PARK.  Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure  Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
 Turn the ignition OFF. those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
 Remove the key fob from the vehicle. should never exit a vehicle while the engine is brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a could result.
WARNING! complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
 Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully damage the drivetrain.
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move- against unwanted movement.
ment and possible injury or damage. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
 When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
 Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmis- position:
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
sion gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal  When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
before exiting the vehicle. access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to forward until it stops and is fully seated.
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is  Look at the transmission gear position display and
moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmis- blinking.
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
sion gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) transmission gear selector.  With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely selector will not move out of PARK.
stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated,  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
before exiting the vehicle. a location accessible to children), and do not leave REVERSE (R)
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
could operate power windows, other controls, or
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
move the vehicle.
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could stop.
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. NEUTRAL (N)
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
(Continued) and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
WARNING! modified depending on engine and transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature following steps:
improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that NOTE:
limit your response to changing traffic or road achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is
the transmission may not re-engage after engine
have a collision. warm. Normal operation will resume once the
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
MANUAL (M) 1. Stop the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other enables full manual control of transmission shifting (also shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
4
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause known as AutoStick mode Ú page 82. Toggling the gear 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
severe transmission damage. selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL turns off.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 104. (AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 221. cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc. 5. Restart the engine.
Transmission Limp Home Mode 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
DRIVE (D) Transmission function is monitored electronically for normal operation.
This range should be used for most city and highway abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home NOTE:
and the best fuel economy. The transmission Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A service is required.
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
shift control to select a lower gear Ú page 82. Under the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve may be necessary.
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
AutoStick In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down

when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature gear selector, or the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an
providing manual shift control, giving you more control of engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, downshift is chosen, except as follows:
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city  In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector in DRIVE),
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer the transmission will automatically shift up when
towing, and many other situations. maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is
fully pressed, the transmission will downshift when
Operation possible. Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector (in the Shift Paddles the transmission to revert to automatic operation.
MANUAL position), or the shift paddles to the MANUAL (M)  If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (gear selector in
position (beside the DRIVE (D) position), or tap one of the 1 — (–) Shift Paddle
MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be main-
shift paddles on the steering wheel. Tapping the (-) shift 2 — (+) Shift Paddle tained until the gear selector is returned to DRIVE, or as
paddle to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the described in the following conditions. The transmission
transmission to the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to will not upshift automatically at redline in this mode,
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The NOTE:
nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal
current transmission gear will be displayed in the  Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift is pressed to the floor.
instrument cluster. paddles (+/-) (if equipped), while the gear selector is in  The transmission will automatically downshift as the
DRIVE, will activate a temporary AutoStick mode. vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the display the current gear.
transmission to the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to  The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster, should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
but the “M” will not be highlighted. The transmission vehicle is accelerated.
will revert back to normal operation (if the gear selector
remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on
accelerator pedal activity.
 In some models, the shift paddles may be disabled (or
re-enabled, as desired) using Drive Mode Set-Up,
accessed by selecting Performance Control.
 You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND

gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be
helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
CONTROL The electric power steering system provides increased
vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The system
 If a requested downshift would cause the engine to Your vehicle is equipped with a SPORT Mode feature. This adapts to different driving conditions. If the electric
overspeed, that shift will not occur and an indication mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from
will display. driving. The engine, transmission (when equipped with providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the
 The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of automatic transmission), and steering systems are all set vehicle manually.
a vehicle speed and an indication will display. to their SPORT settings. SPORT Mode will provide
 Holding the (-) paddle pressed (if equipped), or holding improved throttle response and modified shifting for an WARNING!
the gear selector in the (-) position, will downshift the enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount
of steering feel. This mode may be activated and Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
deactivated by pushing the SPORT button on the safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be 4
speed.
instrument panel switch bank. obtained as soon as possible.
 Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled. NOTE:
 The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a If equipped with a manual transmission, the 1 - 4 Skip Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
fault or overheat condition is detected. Shift feature is disabled in SPORT Mode. through the Uconnect System Ú page 107.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to If the Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light is
the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L — displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the
(if equipped, and the gear selector is already in DRIVE) “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM”
until “D” is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. IF EQUIPPED message is displayed within the instrument cluster
You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time display, this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. dealer for service Ú page 63.
four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver NOTE:
WARNING! inputs or additional driving skills required. When the
 Even if the power steering system is no longer opera-
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a system is active, an indication will display within the
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip instrument cluster “Fuel Economy” main menu screen.
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or NOTE: steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
personal injury. This system may take some time to return to full function- parking maneuvers.
ality after a battery disconnect.  If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER CRUISE C ONTROL WARNING!
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on
the instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h), cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
over temperature condition in the power steering system. depending on engine size and axle ratio. go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message the steering wheel. heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
turn off. snow-covered or slippery.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED To Activate

Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system: Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instrument
 Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is on. To turn
preset speed. the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle “CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is off. The
with the vehicle ahead. system should be turned off when not in use.
NOTE:
Cruise Control Buttons WARNING!
 In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles 1 — On/Off Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature 2 — CANC/Cancel dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
selected. cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
3 — SET (+)/Accel
 Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time. control and have an accident. Always ensure the system
4 — RES/Resume
For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled, is OFF when you are not using it.
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice 5 — SET (-)/Decel
versa.
To Set A Desired Speed To Accelerate For Passing To Deactivate

Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or
the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released, normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise Control
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will the vehicle will return to the set speed. system without erasing the set speed from memory.
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF
set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS position erases the set speed from memory.
will appear indicating what speed was set. A cruise
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
indicator lamp, along with set speed will also appear and
vehicle set speed. Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down  Vehicle parking brake is applied
To Vary The Speed Setting hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.  Stability event occurs
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
 Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE 4
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by  Engine overspeed occurs
pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by pushing  Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmission only)
the SET (-) button. WARNING!
U.S. Speed (mph) Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system ADAPTIVE CRUISE C ONTROL (ACC)
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph. highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
 If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise
snow-covered or slippery.
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the Control function performs differently Ú page 84.
new set speed will be established. ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light
Metric Speed (km/h) To Resume Speed to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of and release. Resume can be used at any speed above and a forward-facing camera designed to detect a vehicle
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h. 20 mph (32 km/h). directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
 If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
NOTE: Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation

WARNING!
 If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will The Cruise Control buttons (located on the right side of the
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the  The ACC system: steering wheel) operate the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset system.
 Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
following distance, while matching the speed of the
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle ahead.
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
 Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive  Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system. tions into account, and may be limited upon
 Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will not adverse sight distance conditions.
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware  Does not always fully recognize complex driving
of the feature selected Ú page 284. conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-  When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, highway construction zones).
1 — CANC/Cancel
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,  When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp; when 2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, 3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
Your complete attention is always required while 4 — Distance Decrease
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.  When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. 5 — SET (+)/Accel
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-  When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a 6 — RES/Resume
sion and death or serious personal injury. constant speed. 7 — SET (-)/Decel
(Continued) 8 — Distance Increase
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
WARNING!
The instrument cluster display shows the current ACC The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
system settings. The information it displays depends on (32 km/h). Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
ACC system status. when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
The system will cancel when the vehicle speed drops set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button until below 15 mph (24 km/h). You could lose control and have a collision. Always
one of the following appears in the instrument cluster When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the ensure the system is off when you are not using it.
display: instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
Cruise Control Off.” When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The 4
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has  When the brakes are applied.
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise NOTE:
 When the parking brake is applied. Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
Control Ready.”
 When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE enabled. To change between the different modes, push
Adaptive Cruise Control Set or NEUTRAL. the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the  When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
display will read “ACC SET.” range. Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to)
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument  When the brakes are overheated. Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
cluster display. To Activate/Deactivate
WARNING!
The ACC screen may display if any of the following ACC Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
activities occur: button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not
 System Cancel “ACC Ready.” react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even
 Driver Override To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
 System Off Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
 ACC Proximity Warning system will turn off and the instrument cluster displays
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
 ACC Unavailable Warning “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
The instrument cluster display will return to the last vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display selected.
activity.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph To Turn Off To Vary The Speed Setting
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h). The system will turn off and erase the set speed in To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
memory if: While ACC is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
NOTE:  The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is SET (+) button, or decrease speed by pushing the SET (-)
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20 mph pushed. button.
(32 km/h).
 The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is U.S. Speed (mph)
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above pushed.
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
speed of the vehicle. a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
To Resume the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
NOTE:  If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
 Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause button and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set The instrument cluster display will show the last set is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” speed. ment cluster display.
will display in the instrument cluster display. Metric Speed (km/h)
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
 If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be controlling
being used. a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0 km/h) the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by
when ACC is active.  If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
the position of the accelerator pedal.
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
To Cancel WARNING! button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed the instrument cluster display.
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and
Cruise Control systems: NOTE:
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is
 The brake pedal is applied. When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-)
too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
 The parking brake is applied. button, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
vehicle.
 The CANC (cancel) button is pushed. decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
 An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs. follow these warnings can result in a collision and death
 The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position. or serious personal injury.
 The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The following condition will only cancel the ACC system:
 The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h).
When ACC Is Active: The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
NOTE:  The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
 When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
 The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
sensor.
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.  The distance setting is changed.
 The ACC system applies the brake down to 15 mph  The system disengages Ú page 87.
(24 km/h) when following a vehicle ahead. The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
 The ACC system maintains set speed when driving the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on necessary.
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
Distance Settings NOTE: 4
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set 1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
applies the brakes.
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC 2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
normal range (overheated). its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar) set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
Setting The Following Distance In ACC flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by To increase the distance setting, push the Distance sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), Setting Increase button and release. Each time the button capacity.
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar NOTE:
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC (longer). The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance warning for the driver to take action and does not neces-
distance setting will show in the instrument cluster
Setting Decrease button and release. Each time the sarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
display.
button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one applying the brakes autonomously.
bar (shorter).
Overtake Aid
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to
same lane, the instrument cluster display will show the
the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
Light, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
the left hand side.
speed.
Display Warnings And Maintenance To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is important SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
to note the following maintenance items:
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF  Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW
VEHICLE” WARNING sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
damage the sensor lens. system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
 Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
warning will display and a chime will sound when
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
require a sensor realignment. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as  If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become to a collision, see an authorized dealer for service. dealer.
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt  Do not attach or install any accessories near the
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will Precautions While Driving With ACC
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
display “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
and the system will deactivate. malfunction. issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” When the condition that deactivated the system is no unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive to intervene. The following are examples of these types of
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by situations:
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the simply reactivating it.
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when TOWING A TRAILER
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path NOTE:
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
this warning may temporarily occur.  If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
NOTE: message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
authorized dealer.
available.
 Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the ACC/FCW operation.
vehicle behind the lower grille.
OFFSET DRIVING USING ACC ON HILLS

ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and steepness of the hill.
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Lane Changing Example 4

NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
ACC Hill Example distance to the vehicle ahead.
Offset Driving Condition Example LANE CHANGING

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
TURNS AND BENDS lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability, changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
the curve, the system will resume your original set speed. detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There
This is a part of normal ACC system functionality. may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
NOTE:
if necessary.
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — PARKSENSE DISPLAY
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle IF EQUIPPED When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn on indicating the system status.
you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
and audible indications of the distance between the rear single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
stationary object as it did not previously detect movement
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up distance and location relative to the vehicle.
from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
(e.g. during a parking maneuver).
if necessary. If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
For limitations of this system and recommendations, display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
see Ú page 95. and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
disabled) from the previous ignition cycle when the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle display will show the single arc moving closer to the
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast to
6 mph (9 km/h). continuous.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs

1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance Greater than 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) 79 inches (200 cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) (30 cm)
Single 1/2 Second
Slow Slow Fast
Audible Alert Chime None Tone Fast Continuous
(for rear center only) (for rear center only) (for rear center only)
(for rear center only)
Arc — Left Rear None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arc — Center Rear None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arc — Right Rear None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
system, the instrument cluster will display the “ParkSense
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Off” message for approximately five seconds. When the ASSIST SYSTEM
Sound and Display is selected from within the Uconnect gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
system Ú page 107. disabled, the instrument cluster display will display the
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
“ParkSense Off” message for as long as the vehicle is in
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
REVERSE.
instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to ignition cycle and it will display the “PARKSENSE
indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE
and the detected obstacle. disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message for five
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense seconds.
ENABLING A ND DISABLING P ARKSENSE switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
LED will be on.
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE  Ensure the ParkSense system is off if objects such as
system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
cluster display will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE PRECAUTIONS 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
WIPE REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE Failure to do so can result in the system misinter-
 Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of snow, ice,
SERVICE REQUIRED” message for as long as the vehicle is preting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the
mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
operating properly.
operate. message to be shown in the instrument cluster display.
 Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” affect the performance of ParkSense or render the
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the
WARNING!
system temporarily unavailable.
outer surface and the inside of the rear fascia/bumper is Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
 When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE, the instrument
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF" for five seconds.
obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the message
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for 4
continues to appear see an authorized dealer. pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the igni-
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” tion. blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an  When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE posi- the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
authorized dealer. tion and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” result in serious injury or death.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash  ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio when it
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In is sounding an audio tone. CAUTION!
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not  ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. Failure to do so can result in the system not working detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an sensors will not be detected when they are in close
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide proximity.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.  The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the
rear view camera image will continue to be displayed until CAUTION!
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an the transmission is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s  To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen X used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The button is pressed. unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of path.
above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed the vehicle.
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
The following table shows the approximate distances for slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
each zone: when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
After five seconds, this note will disappear.
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
NOTE: Distance To The Rear Of The
Zone using ParkView.
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable Vehicle
modes of operation that may be selected through the 0 - 1 ft
Red NOTE:
Uconnect system Ú page 107. (0 - 30 cm)
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature 1 ft - 6.5 ft
Yellow the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be (30 cm - 2 m)
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
6.5 ft or greater
out of REVERSE. However, this feature is canceled if the Green
forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
(2 m or greater)
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
transmission is shifted into PARK, the vehicle's ignition is
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
placed in the OFF position, or by pressing the touchscreen
WARNING! side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door. If the
X button.
gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure to use the correct
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera Drivers must be careful when backing up even when replacement cap for this vehicle.
Delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always 1. Open the fuel filler door.
last touchscreen appears again. check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, 2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counterclockwise.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
up path based on the steering wheel position. The active responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
guidelines will show separate zones that will help indicate must continue to pay attention while backing up.
the distance to the rear of the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
WARNING!
 When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
 Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the is full.
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is  Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
being filled. This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened prop-
 Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in erly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if
violation of most state and federal fire regulations the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
turn on.
LOOSE FUEL F ILLER CAP MESSAGE
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
Fuel Filler Cap container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
4
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
NOTE: while filling. “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the “Check Gascap” message will display in the instrument
hook, located on the fuel filler door. cluster. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly
and press the Trip Odometer button to turn off the
3. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler pipe. CAUTION! message. If the problem continues, the message will
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.  Damage to the fuel system or emissions control appear the next time the vehicle is started.
NOTE: system could result from using an improper fuel tank A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
filler tube cap. may also turn on the MIL.
 When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.  A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities into
 Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle the fuel system. VEHICLE LOADING
to allow excess fuel to drain from the nozzle.  A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the
5. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on. “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information should be
fuel filler door. used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL WARNING! LOADING

Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
drivers side B-pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. important that you do not exceed the maximum front or weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
The label contains the following information: rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If
 Name of manufacturer weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have
vehicle and have a collision.
 Month and year of manufacture exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the
 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front OVERLOADING Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, the brakes operate.
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
 Type of vehicle
long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
NOTE:
 Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH) Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the rear
rear GAWR.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN. of the driver's door for your vehicle's GVWR and GAWRs
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle Ú page 98.
GROSS V EHICLE WEIGHT RATING is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
(GVWR)
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR. TRAILER TOWING
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle In this section, you will find safety tips and information on
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load separately. It is important that you distribute the load limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. evenly over the front and rear axles. vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
GROSS A XLE WEIGHT R ATING (GAWR) shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
possible.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles GVWR. and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or used for trailer towing.
rear GAWR. Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS WARNING!

Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist It is important that you do not exceed the maximum through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
you in understanding the following information: front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
of the vehicle and have a collision. accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not Tongue Weight (TW) addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
exceed the GVWR Ú page 97.
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
your vehicle. control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch 4
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or Trailer Frontal Area may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
ready for operation" condition.
maximum width of the front of a trailer. Rating (GAWR) requirements.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
WARNING!
trailer must be supported by the scale. The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue  An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) system may reduce handling, stability, braking
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer performance, and could result in a collision.
trailer when weighed in combination. swaying motions while traveling.
 Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the Vehicle dealer for additional information.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
trailer sway.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR Ú page 97. Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium
sized trailers.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT RATINGS)

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW
3.6L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lb (454 kg) 100 lb (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lb (454 kg) 100 lb (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Trailer towing with the 5.7L manual transmission, 6.4L and 6.2L Supercharged engine is not recommended.
TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT Consider the following items when computing the weight
WARNING!
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on  The tongue weight of the trailer.  When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
 The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
in or on your vehicle. loss of control, poor performance or damage to
 The weight of the driver and all passengers. brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure or tires.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds  Safety chains must always be used between your
to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Placard for the turning corners. 4
maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
 Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
your vehicle.
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
Weight Distribution
TOWING REQUIREMENTS tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
 GCWR must not be exceeded.
WARNING! components, the following guidelines are recommended.
 Total weight must be distributed between the tow
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front WARNING! vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow ratings are not exceeded:
hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or  Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo  Max loading as defined on the Tire And Loading
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can Information Placard.
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in occur that may be difficult for the driver to control.  GTW
front is the cause of many trailer collisions. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.  GAWR
(Continued)  Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Servicing” Ú page 223. When towing a trailer, never CAUTION!
 Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings. If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
CAUTION! personal injury. be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
 An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
 Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu- effort, and longer stopping distances.
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged. ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
 Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
brake controller is not required.
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over Wiring
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
2,000 lb (907 kg). stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
heavier loads.
motoring safety.
WARNING!
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
Towing Requirements — Tires  Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
 Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake connector.
spare tire. system and cause it to fail. You might not have
NOTE:
 Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing brakes when you need them and could have an acci-
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
while using a full size spare tire. dent.
harness.
 Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe  Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. For proper distance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tire inflation procedures. tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in
 Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
before trailer usage. accident.
 Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
 Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
 For further information Ú page 253.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle TOWING TIPS
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations. Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing up
the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
NOTE:
 Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the vehicle Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
(or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
connectors) before launching a boat into water. controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
 Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area. when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
Seven-Pin Connector NOTE: 4
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy
1 — Backup Lamps
loading conditions will improve performance and extend
2 — Running Lamps transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
3 — Left Stop/Turn buildup. This action will also provide better engine
4 — Ground braking.
5 — Battery Cruise Control — If Equipped
6 — Right Stop/Turn
 Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
7 — Electric Brakes  When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
Four-Pin Connector drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
1 — Ground you can get back to cruising speed.
 Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
2 — Park
maximize fuel efficiency.
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
AutoStick DRIVING TIPS Traction

 When using the AutoStick shift control, select the When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and DRIVING ON S LIPPERY SURFACES wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or Information in this section will aid in safe controlled partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed. launches in adverse conditions. ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions
 To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous Acceleration should be observed:
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-  Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to slushy.
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road  Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
conditions allow. the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving)  Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
wheels. visible.
RECREATIONAL TOWING  Keep tires properly inflated.
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) WARNING!  Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. sudden stop.
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground. amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow,
wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). handling.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe engine, transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING! CAUTION!

Driving through water more than a few inches/  Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s  Driving through standing water may cause damage
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. when driving through standing water. inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
Flowing/Rising Water  Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
braking capabilities, which increases stopping
WARNING! through standing water. Do not continue to operate
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water pedal several times to dry the brakes.
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
can wear away the road or path's surface and cause  Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries
 Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause 4
your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
others around you.
swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
 Always check the depth of the standing water before
Shallow Standing Water driving through it. Never drive through standing
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
standing water, consider the following Warnings and mounted on the vehicle.
Cautions before doing so.  Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
 Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
(Continued)
106
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful WARNING!
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4/4C/4C access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
 ONLY insert trusted media devices/components into
NAV With 8.4-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
Radio Instruction Manual. and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
takes appropriate steps as needed. As always, if you
NOTE: vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
experience unusual behavior, contact an authorized
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only systems to be breached.
dealer immediately, Ú page 280, or refer to your
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.  As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for additional contact
information. behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately.
CYBERSECURITY The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent NOTE:
send or receive information from a wired or wireless version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is To help further improve user experience, features,
network. This information allows systems and features in installed. stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
your vehicle to function properly. breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuco-
nnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
MULTIMEDIA 107
UCONNECT SETTINGS CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE F EATURES For the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display and the Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
this mode, the Uconnect system allows you to access
you to access and change the Customer Programmable
programmable features.
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside NOTE:
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument  All settings should be changed with the ignition in the
panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob ON/RUN position.
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll  Only one area of the touchscreen may be selected at a
through menus and change settings. Push the center of time.
the control knob one or more times to select or change a
When making a selection, press one button on the
setting.
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and desired mode, press and release the preferred setting 5
MUTE buttons on the faceplate. Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On The option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting
the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the
screen to turn the screen on.
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right
certain option on the Uconnect system. side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
NOTE:
Availability of settings, setting names, and menu options
can vary depending on vehicle features, equipped
Uconnect system, and the currently installed software.
108 MULTIMEDIA
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen
language.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages
Language
are English, Français, and Español.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available
settings are:
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it
automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
Display Mode
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
Display Brightness With Headlights ON setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
MULTIMEDIA 109

Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting will allow you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five
Control Screen Timeout
seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.

SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts This setting will turn the weather alerts on or off.
Units 5
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument
cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:

US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or
Custom
bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (HP [US], HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque” (lb-ft or
Nm) units of measurement independently.
110 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:

This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief”
Voice Response Length setting provides a shortened audio description from the system. The “Detailed” setting
provides the full audio description from the system.
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and
Show Command List
provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the
Command List off.
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:

This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control
Sync Time With GPS
the time via the GPS location.
This setting will allow you set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off
Time Format for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format.
The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
MULTIMEDIA 111

This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting
Set Time Hours to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the
hours.
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
Set Time Minutes setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features. Depending on the radio equipped in the vehicle,
the following Camera settings may be located in the Safety/Assistance settings. 5
NOTE:

This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
112 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
When the Safety/Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ depending on the
features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options
related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:

This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view,
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system
signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will
deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime
Forward Collision Warning
when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an
audible chime and apply brake pressure when a collision is detected.
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and
ParkSense
can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
Rear ParkSense Volume
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will
Blind Spot Alert
activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting
will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
MULTIMEDIA 113

This setting will adjust the Electric Power Steering modes. Setting options are “Normal”,
Electric Power Steering
“Sport”, and “Comfort”.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
REVERSE.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE.
Mirrors & Wipers

5
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:

This Setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE. Setting options
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse
are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Setting options are
Headlights with Wipers
“On” and “Off”.
114 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
 When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
Headlight Off Delay after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the Lock button
Flash Lights With Lock
is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 115
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:

Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when the Lock button
Flash Lights With Lock
is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off”
setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting
Sound Horn With Lock
will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will
5
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed
to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the
Remote Door Unlock/1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks
first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors on the first
push of the Unlock button.
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™)
Passive Entry
on or off.
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
to the key fob.
116 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort

When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been
activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:

This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off.
Easy Exit Seat
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Key Off/Engine Off Options

When the Key Off/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only activate when the
ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:

This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off.
Easy Exit Seat
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 117

This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
Key Off/Engine Off Power Delay When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”,
and “90 sec”.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE: 5

This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right
Balance/Fade
of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume
Speed Adjusted Volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port.
AUX Volume Offset
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
118 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:

Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The following settings are
Do Not Disturb “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto
Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Projection Manager This setting will activate your smartphone to project on the vehicle’s touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA 119
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio
channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
 A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
Tune Start
channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of
the skipped channels.
5
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a
Subscription Information
separate subscription.
Restore/Reset Settings
When the Restore/Reset Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These
settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:

Restore Settings/Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Reset App Drawer/Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from
Clear Personal Data
the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
120 MULTIMEDIA
Clear Personal Data

When the Clear Personal Data button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays information related to your personal information.
NOTE:

Clear Personal Data This setting will clear the personal data on the radio.
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:

Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
MULTIMEDIA 121
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM O VERVIEW

1 — Radio Button 5 — Controls Button
2 — Media Button 6 — Phone Button
3 — Climate Button 7 — Settings Button
4 — Apps Button
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
122 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and
Radio/Media
access the radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 124.
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone
Phone
system Ú page 135.
Settings Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 107.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on

the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio
station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it
again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off button on the
faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the
radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from freezing.
MULTIMEDIA 123
Feature Description
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated seats and
Controls — If Equipped
steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Mobile apps.
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate control functions
Climate
Ú page 45.
DRAG & D ROP MENU B AR 1. Press the Apps button to open the App screen. Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar. Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to
are easily customized for your preference. Simply follow do so may result in injury or property damage.
these steps: NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.
 Become familiar with the Uconnect features and appli- 5
cations in this vehicle before you drive on the roadway
SAFETY AND G ENERAL I NFORMATION so using Uconnect will be more intuitive and will not
require prolonged viewing of the screen while you are
Safety Guidelines driving.
 When driving, looking at the touchscreen should only
WARNING! be done by a glance when safe to do so. If prolonged
viewing of the screen is required, choose a safe and
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. secure location where you can pull over and park safely
Your complete attention is always required while driving to do so.
to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only use and  Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do
interact with the features and applications when it is so may cause injury or damage to the product. See an
safe to do so. Failure to follow these warnings can authorized dealer for repair.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop result in a collision and death or serious personal  Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level
injury. that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emer-
gency vehicles.
Please read this manual carefully before using the system.
It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
124 MULTIMEDIA
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System UCONNECT MODES Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
 The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic (AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
device. Do not let young children use the system. STEERING W HEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
 Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
music or sound system at loud volumes. Exercise The remote sound system controls are located on the rear button in the center. The function of the left-hand control
caution when setting the volume on the system. surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock is different depending on which mode you are in.
positions. The following describes the left-hand control operation in
 Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture away
from the system. Besides damage to the system, each mode:
moisture can cause electric shocks as with any
Radio Operation
electronic device.
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
NOTE: available station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
Many features of this system are speed dependent. seek down for the next available station.
For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion. The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
Care And Maintenance programmed in the radio presets.
 Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp Media Mode
objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could
scratch the surface. Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track on the
Remote Sound System Controls selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the
 Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the
screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing the
cloth in order to clean the touchscreen. button in the center and controls the volume and mode of bottom switch goes to the beginning of the current track,
the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will or the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
 If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker seconds after the current track begins to play. Double
cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an
switch will decrease the volume. pressing the bottom button switch will skip to the previous
isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be
track if it is after eight seconds into the current track.
sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions
and directions Ú page 284.
MULTIMEDIA 125
RADIO MODE The radio is equipped with the following modes: Seek
 AM The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing
Radio Controls  FM the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right
 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Equipped) and left of the radio station display or by pushing the left
steering wheel audio control button up or down.
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter the
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, Seek Up and Seek Down
can then be selected by pressing the corresponding
button in Radio Mode. Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button to tune the radio to the next available station or
Volume & On/Off Control
channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on and off reaches the starting station after passing through the
the Uconnect system. entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station
The electronic volume control turns continuously where it began.
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob clockwise
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down 5
increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases it. Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up or
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set Seek Down button to advance the radio through the
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display at the same volume level as last played. available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio
1 — Radio Bands Mute Button stops at the next available station or channel when the
2 — Preset Radio Stations button on the touchscreen is released.
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the system.
3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations NOTE:
Tune/Scroll Control
4 — Status Bar Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
5 — Browse
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station Seek Down button will scan the different frequency
6 — Seek Down frequency. Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a bands at a slower rate.
7 — Tune selection.
8 — Seek Up
9 — Audio Settings
10 — Bottom Menu Bar
126 MULTIMEDIA
Direct Tune Push the VR button on the steering wheel and wait for SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the radio the beep to say a command. See an example: broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast-to-coast
screen to directly tune to a desired radio station or radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
 “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
channel. Visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or review
 “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Press the available number button on the touchscreen to your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s Manual
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of what to kit for more information.
begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately
(stations that cannot be reached) will become and say “Help”. The system provides you with a list of after the trial included with the new vehicle purchase.
deactivated/grayed out. commands. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your
Undo SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically
renew and bill at then-current rates until you call
You can backspace an entry by pressing the If Equipped SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Back button on the touchscreen. Customer Agreement for complete terms at
GO www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press All fees and programming subject to change. SiriusXM®
“Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and the system will satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and
automatically tune to that station. older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our SiriusXM®
satellite service is also available in Canada and Puerto
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite service area
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM® and in AK. © 2022 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
(Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial Radio Inc.
required.)
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
NOTE:
Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all
SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song and
artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune start, and
others.
MULTIMEDIA 127
This functionality is only available for radios equipped with The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM Favorite button functions are available in SiriusXM®
a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the button on the touchscreen. Mode.
vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky. When in Satellite Mode:
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might have to  The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.
change the vehicle’s position in order to receive a signal.
 The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of the
In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal
screen.
in underground parking garages or tunnels.
 The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the
No Subscription center.
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a  The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the radio the Channel Number.
does not have the necessary subscription, the radio is  The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below
able to receive the Preview channel only. the Program Information.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription, US Tune, similar to other Radio Bands. 5
residents visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or In addition to the tuning operation functions common to
call: 1-800-643-2112 all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/Weather button, and Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call: 1 — Browse
1-888-539-7474. 2 — Replay
NOTE: 3 — Seek Down Button
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located at 4 — Direct Tune Button
the bottom of the Channel 0 screen. 5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
128 MULTIMEDIA
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause

the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can
Play/Pause
be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on
the touchscreen.
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the
content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind
Rewind button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content
at the point at which the press is released.
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding
of the content can only be done when the content is
previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live
Forward
content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is
released.
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the

Live
playing of live content.
MULTIMEDIA 129
FAVORITES BROWSE IN SXM All

Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to activate Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When pressing
the favorites menu, which will time out within 20 seconds the All button, the following categories become available:
in absence of user interaction.  Channel List: Press the Channel List to display all the
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X button. SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the
Channel List by pressing the Up and Down arrows,
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist or located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can
song that is currently playing. The radio then uses this also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
information to alert you when either the favorite artist or
 Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touchscreen
song is being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
to display a list of Genres. You can select any desired
Channels.
Genre by pressing the Genre List. The radio tunes to a
The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in channel with the content in the selected Genre.
the Radio is 50. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Presets — If Equipped
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a favorite
artist, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and
1 — All Button Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at the left of 5
2 — Presets Button the Browse screen.
then the Favorite Artist button on the touchscreen.
3 — Favorites Button You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up and
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a favorite 4 — Game Zone Button Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
song, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
then the Favorite Song button on the touchscreen. knob as well.
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit
Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along
with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit
submenus to return to a parent menu by pressing the
Back arrow.
130 MULTIMEDIA
Preset Selection Remove Favorites Select Team — If Equipped

A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen. Press the Select Team button on the touchscreen to
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear,
Preset. When selected, the Radio tunes to the station Favorite to be deleted. then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding
stored in the Preset. Alert Settings box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.
Deleting A Preset Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Favorites Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen.
pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset. a visual alert or audible and visual alert when one of your Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
Favorites favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels. all of the selections or press the Trash Can icon next to the
Game Zone selection to be deleted.
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the Alert Settings
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the Favorites
list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from “Alert
items in the Favorites list. On-Air me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert upon score
update” or both when one or more of your selections is
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen. provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the Tune Start
knob as well. list tunes the radio to that channel. Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
the 12 presets. This feature occurs the first time the
preset is selected during that current song.
MULTIMEDIA 131
Setting Presets PRESET FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED Return To Main Radio Screen

Browse In AM/FM You can return to the Main Radio Screen by pressing the X
button or the Back Arrow button when in the Browse
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides a Presets screen.
means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing
the ENTER/BROWSE button. Audio Settings
Scrolling Preset List Press the Audio button within the settings main menu to
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll the activate the Audio Settings screen.
preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL knob or by The audio settings can also be accessed on the Radio
pressing the Up or Down Arrow key, located on the right of Mode screen by pressing the Audio button. You can return
the screen. to the Radio screen by pressing the X button.
Preset Selection From List
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button or the 5
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted
activated by pressing any of the Preset buttons, located at Preset.
the top of the screen.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in the
When you are on a station that you wish to save as a Presets.
preset, press and hold the numbered button on the
Deleting Presets
touchscreen for more than two seconds.
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio
pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.
Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen. You can Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
switch between the radio presets list by pressing the Arrow
button located in the upper right of the radio touchscreen.
132 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front
Balance/Fade speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear,
Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Press the + or - button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the
Equalizer equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at
the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This
alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Volume increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road
noise.
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a
Surround Sound
movie theatre or home theatre system.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and - buttons. This alters the AUX input
AUX Volume Offset audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed
above the adjustment bar.
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is connected
Auto Play to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press “Off” to turn the
setting off.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
Radio Off With Door
passenger door is opened or until the “Radio Off Delay” selected time has expired.
MULTIMEDIA 133
MEDIA M ODE Audio Source Selection BLUETOOTH® MODE

Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source Select Overview
Operating Media Mode button on the touchscreen and the desired mode button Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is
on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing music,
Media sources available. When available, you can select to the Uconnect system.
the Browse button on the touchscreen to be given these
options: Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired
to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect
 Now Playing system.
 Artists
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® button
 Albums
on the left side of the touchscreen or under the Source
 Genres Select/Select Source button (if equipped).
 Songs
 Playlists
 Folders 5
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info button
on the touchscreen for artist information on the current
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode song playing.
1 — Repeat Types of Media Modes
2 — Select Source
3 — Track Time USB MODE
4 — Shuffle Overview
5 — Info USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into the
6 — Browse USB port, by selecting the USB button on the left side of Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
7 — Tracks the touchscreen, or by selecting the Source Select/Select
Source button and then selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).
134 MULTIMEDIA
AUX MODE In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Up Repeat
button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the touchscreen
Overview Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will
using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port, the current selection, or return to the beginning of the continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button again to
touchscreen or under the Source Select button (if first second of the current selection. enter Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
equipped). Browse current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat function
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the Auxiliary In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the touchscreen is active. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat button a
device cable into the AUX port. If you insert an Auxiliary to display the browse window. In USB Mode, the left side third time.
device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will of the browse window displays a list of ways you can Shuffle
switch to AUX Mode and begin to play. browse through the contents of the USB device. If In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen
Controlling The Auxiliary Device supported by the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist, to play the selections on the USB device in random order
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired button on the to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port touchscreen on the left side of the screen. The center of button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this
or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the the browse window shows items and their sub-functions, feature off.
touchscreen, or under the Source Select button (if which can be scrolled through by pressing the Up and
Down buttons to the right. The TUNE/SCROLL knob can Audio
equipped).
also be used to scroll. Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the Audio
NOTE: button Ú page 125.
Media Mode
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control In USB Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen Info
on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insuffi- to select the desired audio source: USB. In USB Mode, press the Info button on the touchscreen to
cient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on the display the current track information. Press the Info or X
the device. touchscreen to select the desired audio source: button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel this
Bluetooth®. feature.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
to select the desired audio source: AUX.
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device.
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current
selection, or to return to the beginning of the previous
selection if the USB device is within the first three seconds
of the current selection.
MULTIMEDIA 135
Tracks Push the VR button located on the steering wheel.  Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen After the beep, say one of the following commands and  Calling Back the last incoming call number
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The song currently follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose (“Call Back”).
playing is indicated by an arrow and lines above and below an artist:  Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming Calls,”
the song title. When in the Tracks List screen you can “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,” or “Show
 “Change source to Bluetooth®”
rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight a track Recent Calls”).
 “Change source to AUX”
(indicated by the line above and below the track name)  Searching Contacts phone number
 “Change source to USB”
and then push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing (“Search for John Smith Mobile”).
that track.  “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”;
Screen Activated Features
“Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device supports  Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
this feature, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen  Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device.
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently displayed on the touchscreen.
Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist,
playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines above
album, song, and genre information is displayed.  Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they are
and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the PHONE MODE
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen. 5
 Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.  Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.
Overview
 Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, to connect to them quickly.
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to dial a
phone number with your mobile phone.
NOTE:
auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only available for
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Blue-
connected USB and AUX devices. The feature supports the following: tooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Voice Activated Features Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
 Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile” vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
or “Dial 248-555-1212”). your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
 Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
 Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward one of
18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/text
messages.
136 MULTIMEDIA
For Uconnect customer support: Phone Button You will be prompted for a specific command and then
 US visit UconnectPhone.com or call 877-855-8400 The Phone button on your steering wheel is guided through the available options.
 Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call used to get into the Phone Mode and make  Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
800-387-9983 view phonebook, etc. When you push the prompt.
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give  For certain operations, compound commands can be
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your a command. used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone Voice Command Button “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
for private conversation. compound command can be said: “Call John Smith
The Voice Command button on your steering
mobile.”
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
WARNING!  For each feature explanation in this section, only the
are already in a call or want to make another
compound command form of the voice command is
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering call.
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks The button on your steering wheel is also used to access say each part of the command when you are asked for
related to the use of the Uconnect features and the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command it. For example, you can use the compound command
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it features if your vehicle is equipped. form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an can break the compound command form into two voice
accident involving serious injury or death.
Phone Operation
commands: “Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
OPERATION
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as
The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth®
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Phone and to navigate its menu structure. Voice from you.
Bluetooth® technology — the global standard that enables
commands are required after most Uconnect Phone
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you phone is
prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice NATURAL SPEECH
Command works:
turned on with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
devices are allowed to be linked to the system. Only one mobile”.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can 2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
be used with the system at a time. guide you to complete the task. certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I would
like to”.
MULTIMEDIA 137
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE NOTE:
sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly PHONE  You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or
Use this QR code to access your digital complete this procedure.
sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who experience.  The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was To begin using your Uconnect Phone, Follow these steps to pair your phone:
requested but the specific name was not recognized. you must pair your compatible 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
2. Press the Phone button.
requires more information from the user, it will ask a Mobile phone pairing is the process of
question to which the user can respond without pushing establishing a wireless connection NOTE:
the Voice Command button on the steering wheel. between a cellular phone and the  If there are no phones currently connected with
Uconnect system. the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
HELP COMMAND To complete the pairing process, you will need to would like to pair a mobile phone.
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please visit  This pop-up only appears when the user enters
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone Phone Mode and no other device(s) have previ- 5
beep. compatibility information. ously been paired. If the system has a phone previ-
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the ously paired, even if no phone is currently
Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a connected with the system, this pop-up will not
command or say “Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a appear.
push of the VR button or the Phone button. 3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
CANCEL COMMAND Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and  Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
you will be returned to the main menu.
 Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button on your Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to
steering wheel when the system is listening for a search for Bluetooth® connections.
command and be returned to the main or previous menu.
138 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a DEVICE
your touchscreen asking you to make sure the PIN on the time. If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect”
touchscreen matches the PIN from the pop-up on your from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® 1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to begin.
mobile phone. screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to 2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
the Bluetooth® device.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to pair a 3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen to
mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing or Settings NOTE: display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
button from the Uconnect Phone main screen. For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone 4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
 Press the Paired Phones button or the Add Device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
The most recent phone paired will have the higher priority. NOTE:
button.
If there is no device currently connected with the system,
 Search for available devices on your Blue- NOTE: a pop-up will appear.
tooth®-enabled mobile phone. When prompted During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
your mobile phone for the Uconnect system to access your 5. Search for available devices on your
on the phone, select “Uconnect” and accept the
“messages” and “contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When prompted
connection request.
sync your contacts with the Uconnect system. on the device, confirm the PIN shown on the
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen Uconnect screen.
while the system is connecting. You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones”
to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process screen
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, while the system is connecting.
select “Uconnect.” the radio.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the NOTE: completed, the system will prompt you to choose
connection request from Uconnect. Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system whether or not this is your favorite device. Selecting
may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this “Yes” will make this device the highest priority. This
9. When the pairing process has successfully
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first device will take precedence over other paired devices
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on within range.
whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting
your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect
“Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This
from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth® NOTE:
phone will take precedence over other paired phones
settings. For devices which are not made a favorite, the device
within range and will connect to the Uconnect system
priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
automatically when entering the vehicle.
The most recent device paired will have the higher priority.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones”
to bring up a list of paired audio devices.
MULTIMEDIA 139
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE 1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING button. PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button. PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range. If 3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has the
you need to choose a particular phone or audio device device name for a different phone or audio device ability to download contact names and number entries
follow these steps: than the currently connected device or press the from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth®
preferred Connected Phone from the list. Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may support this
1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. feature. Your mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete Device for permission for the Uconnect system to access your
3. Press to select the particular phone or the particular messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
button on the touchscreen.
audio device. A pop-up menu will appear; press your contacts with the Uconnect system.
“Connect Phone”. 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. supported phones.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE  To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook 5
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
Ú page 143.
AUDIO DEVICE 1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen, press
 Automatic download and update of a phonebook, if
the Settings button located to the right of the device
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
name for a different phone or audio device than the
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
currently connected device or press the preferred
example, after you start the vehicle.
“Connected Phone” from the list.
 A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. per contact will be downloaded and updated every time
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen; a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the
list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.

140 MULTIMEDIA
 Depending on the maximum number of entries down- TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED CALL CONTROLS
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail- 1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from the The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- Phone main screen. features:
able for use. 2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the Settings Gear
 Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile icon next to the contact you want to remove from your
phone is accessible. favorites. This will bring up the options for that
 This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or Favorite contact.
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be 3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next Phone Call Features
phone connection. The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For
There are two ways you can add an entry to your favorites: example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way
calling, this feature can be accessed through the
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider 1 — Answer
Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press for the features that you have.
one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that 2 — End
appears on the list. Here are the phone options with Uconnect: 3 — Mute/Unmute
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select  Redial 4 — Transfer
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and then  Dial by pressing in the number 5 — Join Calls
select the appropriate number. Press the Down Arrow  Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
button or the Settings Gear button next to the Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
Other phone call features include:
selected number to display the option’s pop-up. In the  Favorites
pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.  End Call
 Mobile Phonebook
 Hold/Unhold/Resume
NOTE:  Recent Call Log
 Swap two active calls
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an  SMS Message Viewer
existing favorite.
MULTIMEDIA 141
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY DO NOT DISTURB

1. Press the Phone button. With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen. incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on
the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed. there is a counter display to keep track of your missed
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to calls and text messages while Do Not Disturb is active.
enter the number and press “Dial/Call”. Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED and send it to voicemail.
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the Automatic reply messages can be:
following call types:
 “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly”.
 All Calls  Create a custom auto reply message up to
 Incoming Calls or Calls Received Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display 160 characters.
 Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
NOTE:
5
1 — Answer Button
 Missed Calls
2 — Caller ID Box Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Calls touchscreen while typing a custom message.
button on the phone main screen.
While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be selected
You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — so you can still place a second call without being
and perform the operation. For example, say “Show my CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS interrupted by incoming calls.
incoming calls”. If a call is currently in progress and you have another NOTE:
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile  Reply with text message is not compatible with
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS phone. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, iPhone® devices.
press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the  Auto reply with text message is only available on
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer phones that support Bluetooth® Message Access
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
the incoming call. Profile (MAP).
Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen. NOTE:
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the current Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect system in
call on hold or answer the incoming call. the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
142 MULTIMEDIA
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD JOIN CALLS Advanced Phone Connectivity

During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold button When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
on the Phone main screen. hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the Phone TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
main screen to combine all calls into a conference call. PHONE
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
CALL IS IN PROGRESS CALL TERMINATION transferred from your mobile phone without terminating
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press
keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent calls, steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be terminated the Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new
active call.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS Phone
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
VOICE COMMAND
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.” For the best performance:
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number  Always wait for the beep before speaking
that was dialed from your mobile phone.  Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away
CALL CONTINUATION from you
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the  Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been voice command period
switched to OFF.  Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
NOTE:  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until  Low Road Noise
the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth®  Smooth Road Surface
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
connection. It is recommended to press the Transfer  Fully Closed Windows
press the Swap Calls button on the phone main screen.
button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.  Dry Weather Conditions
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the
active and held phone call.
MULTIMEDIA 143
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to 2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has been
WARNING! a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the read.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You Uconnect Phone. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, re-
have full responsibility and assume all risks related to Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering peat one of the predefined messages and follow the
the use of the Uconnect features and applications in the in-vehicle audio volume. system prompts.
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Phone Voice Commands
Failure to do so may result in an accident involving PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
serious injury or death. Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check Start without
Even though the system is designed for many languages UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and No. I’ll be late.
me.
and accents, the system may not always work for some. pairing instructions.
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or
NOTE: Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to say a 10, 15, 20, 25,
It is recommended that you do not store names in your command. Here are some examples: Are you there 30, 45, 60>
Call me.
Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
 “Call John Smith”
yet? minutes late. 5
Number and name recognition rate is optimized when the  “Dial 123 456 7890” I need See you in 5 <or
entries are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” I’ll call you later.
 “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number) directions. 10, 15, 20, 25,
(zero). 30, 45, 60>
 “Call back” (call previously answered incoming phone
Even though international dialing for most number I’m on my way. Can’t talk right minutes.
number)
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number now.
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, push I’m lost. Thanks.
combinations may not be supported.
the Phone button and say “Call”, then pronounce the
Audio Performance
name exactly as it appears in your phonebook. When a NOTE:
Audio quality is maximized under: contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call Only use the numbering listed in the provided table.
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting John Smith work”. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the message.
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed Voice Text Reply — If Equipped Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full
 Low Road Noise Uconnect can announce incoming text messages. Push implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to
 Smooth Road Surface take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
the VR button or Phone button and say:
 Fully Closed Windows UconnectPhone.com.
 Dry Weather Conditions 1. “Listen” to have the system read an incoming text
message. (Must have compatible mobile phone Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading incoming
 Operation From The Driver's Seat text messages only. For further information on how to
paired to Uconnect system.)
enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your
iPhone® “User Manual”.
144 MULTIMEDIA
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with

iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came
Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
IF EQUIPPED with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected to your ANDROID AUTO™
vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use your voice to send
text messages, select media, place phone calls and much
experience.
more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what
you mean and responds back to confirm your requests. Android Auto™ is a feature of your
The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and Uconnect system, and your Android™
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform 6.0 or higher powered smartphone
useful tasks. with a data plan, that allows you to
project your smartphone and a number
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
display. Android Auto™ brings you useful information, and
you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts
organizes it into simple cards that appear just when they Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
and music, get directions, read text messages, and many
are needed. Android Auto™ can be used with speech
other useful requests. NOTE:
technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs and
buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio display’s To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an area with
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may use cellular data
touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android
Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect Auto™, perform the following procedure: and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right
Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally corner of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.
be re-established by restarting the mobile phone. Your NOTE:
3. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to
ON Mode. phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may
the Android Auto™ icon.
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
POWER-UP 1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the Google NOTE:
Play store on your Android™-powered smartphone. Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately once a
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the compatible device is connected. You can also launch it by
ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you 2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone to one
pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the touchscreen.
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the Android
Ú page 284. Auto™ app was not downloaded, the first time you
plug your device in the app begins to download.
Your vehicle should be in PARK the first time you use
the app.
MULTIMEDIA 145
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your Uconnect NOTE: Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to interact with
system, the following features can be utilized using your Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your its best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle’s
smartphone’s data plan: smartphone prior to using Android Auto™ for them to work voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data
 Google Maps™ for navigation with Android Auto™. plan to project your Android™-powered smartphone and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen.
 YouTube Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music NOTE: Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher to one of the media
 Hands-free calling and texting for communication To see the track details for the music playing through USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and
 Various compatible apps Android Auto™, select the Uconnect system’s media press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your
screen.
Maps Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™.
For further information, refer to https:// Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or
Push and hold the Voice Recognition (VR)
support.google.com/androidauto. press and hold the Microphone icon within Android Auto™,
button on the steering wheel until the beep or
to activate its VR, which recognizes natural voice
tap the Microphone icon to ask Google to take Communication commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features:
you to a desired destination by voice. You can
With Android Auto™ connected, push and hold  Maps
also touch the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access
the VR button on the steering wheel to activate
other navigation apps.
voice recognition specific to Android Auto™.
 Music 5
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™ provides  Phone
This allows you to send and reply to text
voice-guided: messages, have incoming text messages read out loud,  Text Messages
and place and receive hands-free calls.  Additional Apps
 Navigation
 Live traffic information Apps NOTE:
 Lane guidance  To use Android Auto™ on your car display, you’ll need
The Android Auto™ App displays all the compatible apps
For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/ that are available to use with Android Auto™, every time it an Android™ phone running Android™ 6.0 or higher, an
(US) or https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ is launched. You must have the compatible app active data plan, and the Android Auto™ app.
(Canada). downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app through  To wirelessly use Android Auto™ on your car display,
For further information on the navigation function, please your mobile device for it to work with Android Auto™. you need a compatible Android™ smartphone with an
refer to https://support.google.com/android or https:// active data plan. You can check which smartphones
Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/ to see the are compatible at g.co/androidauto/requirements.
support.google.com/androidauto/. latest list of available apps for Android Auto™.
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
Music Android Auto™ Voice Command
Android Auto™ allows you to access and NOTE:
stream your favorite music with apps like
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
YouTube Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify.
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may
Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
stream endless music on the road.
146 MULTIMEDIA
APPLE C ARPLAY® NOTE: Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Uconnect
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. You can also system, the following features can be utilized using your
Use this QR code to access your digital launch it by pressing the Apple CarPlay® icon on the iPhone® data plan:
experience. touchscreen.  Phone
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple  Music
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure  Messages
way to use your iPhone® in the car, and  Maps
stay focused on the road. Use your
Uconnect Touchscreen display, the Phone
vehicle's knobs and controls, and your With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold the VR
voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music®, Maps, button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri
Messages, and more. voice recognition session. You can also press
NOTE: and hold the Home button within Apple
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you to make
phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may calls or listen to voicemail as you normally would using Siri
or may not be available in every region and/or language. on your iPhone®.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using iPhone® NOTE:
5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR session, not a Siri
iPhone® is unlocked for the very first connection only, and
then use the following procedure: 1 — LTE Data Coverage session, and it will not function with Apple CarPlay®.
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media USB 2 — Apple CarPlay® Icon Music
ports in your vehicle.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your
NOTE: NOTE: artists, playlists, and music from iTunes® or
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular data is any third party application installed on your
came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular device. Using your iPhone® data plan, you can
work. coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the also use select third party audio apps including music,
left side of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply. news, sports, podcasts, and more.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to
the Apple CarPlay® Icon.
MULTIMEDIA 147
Messages Apple CarPlay® Voice Command ANDROID AUTO™ AND A PPLE

Push and hold the VR button on the steering NOTE: C ARPLAY® TIPS A ND T RICKS
wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
session. Apple CarPlay® allows you to use Siri phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay® features may not be Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic Bluetooth®
to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also available in every region and/or language. Pairing
read incoming text messages, but drivers will not be able After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® for
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to interact
to read messages, as everything is done via voice. the first time and undergoing the setup procedure, the
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
Maps and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your smartphone pairs to the Uconnect system via Bluetooth®
iPhone® and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect without any setup required every time it is within range, if
Push and hold the VR button on the steering Bluetooth® is turned on.
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of
wheel until the beep or tap the Microphone
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning NOTE:
icon to ask Apple® Siri to take you to a desired
cable, and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while Android
destination by voice. You can also touch the
replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth® connections to
Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access
Apple® Maps.
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the Home button within
function. The connected device is unavailable to other 5
devices when connected using Android Auto™ or Apple
Apps Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural CarPlay®.
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible apps that are voice commands to use a list of your iPhone® features:
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect System —
available to use, every time it is launched. You must have  Phone If Equipped
the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed  Music
in to the app through your mobile device for it to work with It is possible to have multiple devices connected to the
 Messages
Apple CarPlay®. Uconnect system. For example, if using Android Auto™/
 Maps — If Equipped Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (US) or  Additional Apps — If Equipped place hands-free phone calls or send hands-free text
https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Canada) to see messages. However, another device can also be paired to
NOTE:
the latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®. the Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source,
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is
a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered in the US and other so the passenger can stream music.
countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements NOTE:
apply. Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be launched
from the front and center console USB ports.
148 MULTIMEDIA
PERFORMANCE PAGES The Performance Pages include the following: The following describes each feature and its operation:
Performance Pages is an application that provides a

 Home
HOME
 Timers
display for performance indicators, as received from the
 Gauges
instrument cluster, that will help you gain familiarity with
 G-Force
the capabilities of your vehicle in real time.
 Engine
To access the Performance Pages, press the Apps button
 Dyno
on the touchscreen then press the Performance Pages
button on the touchscreen. Press the desired button on If a USB drive is installed in the media hub, press the
the touchscreen to access that specific Performance Camera icon on the top right of the touchscreen when
Page. using Performance Pages. A screen shot of the page will
be taken and saved onto the USB.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be Performance Pages — Home
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured When Home is selected, a series of widgets (gauges) can
by the Performance Pages must never be exploited in a be customized by the user. Follow these steps to change a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize widget. Either press directly on the widget you want to
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, change, or:
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. 1. Press the Settings button (gear icon) on the
touchscreen to access the main menu for the
widgets.
Screenshot Camera Button 2. Select one the following options from the menu:
 Set Widget: Top Left
 Set Widget: Top Right
 Set Widget: Bottom Left
 Set Widget: Bottom Right
MULTIMEDIA 149
3. After selecting a widget location, select the gauge to  Timer: 330 ft (100 m) 2. Towards the bottom of the screen, a checkbox will
display:  Timer: 1/8 Mile (200 m) appear next to “Include historical data in
 Gauge: Oil Temp screenshot.” Click the box to signify that this feature
 Timer: 1000 ft (300 m) will be on.
 Gauge: Oil Pressure  Timer: 1/4 Mile (400 m)
 Gauge: Coolant Temp  Timer: Braking Distance
 Gauge: Battery Voltage  Timer: Reaction Time
 Gauge: Trans Temp — If Equipped with an Auto-
Historical Data
matic Transmission
The Historical Data feature allows you to view information
 Gauge: Boost Pressure — If Equipped
about your vehicle such as the VIN, miles on the odometer,
 Gauge: Air/Fuel Ratio — If Equipped longitude and latitude coordinates, and more.
 Gauge: I/C Coolant Temp — If Equipped To activate the Historical Data feature on your
touchscreen, follow these steps:
 Gauge: Intake Air Temp 5
 Gauge: Engine Torque 1. Select the Home page tab within Performance
Pages. Then, press the settings icon (gear icon) in
 Gauge: Engine Power
the upper right hand corner of the touchscreen.
 Gauge: G-Force Historical Data
 Gauge: Steering Angle
NOTE:
 Gauge: Current Gear Once the checkbox is selected, the bottom bar of the
 Gauge: Current Speed screen will be replaced with the historical data from your
vehicle present at the time the screenshot icon was
 Timer: 0–60 mph (0–100 km/h)
pressed.
 Timer: 0–100 mph (0–160 km/h)
 Timer: 60 ft (20 m)
Home Page Settings

150 MULTIMEDIA
When the Timers Page is selected, you will be able to

select the Drag or Accel & Braking tabs. The following will
be displayed:
 Recent
The most recent successful run of performance timers.
If a run does not complete within the timers limit, or is
aborted, the values shown will revert to the most recent
valid run.
 Last
The last recorded successful run of performance
timers.
 Best
The best recorded run of performance timers, except
Historical Data Historical Data Camera Icon for braking data.
1 — Outside Temperature TIMERS  Save
2 — Date Pressing the Save button will let you save the visible
3 — Odometer page, Recent/Last/Best. Any saved run over 10 will
overwrite the last saved run for Uconnect system
4 — Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
storage.
5 — Longitude And Latitude Coordinates
NOTE:
Pressing the Camera icon in the upper right corner of the
3. To take a screenshot of the historical data, make sure screen at any time will save a screenshot of the screen
a USB device is plugged into the vehicle. Next, click currently being viewed to the connected USB device.
the Camera icon located in the top right corner of the
touchscreen. The historical data image file will be
saved to the USB drive.
Performance Pages — Timers

MULTIMEDIA 151
NOTE:  1000 ft (300 m) ET

Drag timers (RT, 60 ft [20 m], 330 ft [100 m], 1/8 mile Displays the time it takes the vehicle to go 1000 ft
[200 m], 1000 ft [300 m], and 1/4 mile [400 m]). (300 m).
 ¼ Mile (400 m) ET
NOTE:
Accel & Braking timers (0-60 mph [0-100 km/h], Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go ¼ mile
0-100 mph [0-160 km/h], Brake from mph [km/h], and (400 m).
Brake Distance ft [meters]).  ¼ Mile (400 m) mph
Displays the speed the vehicle was at when ¼ mile
 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
(400 m) was reached.
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from
 Brake Distance ft (meters)
0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a
 0-100 mph (0-160 km/h)
complete stop.
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from
Timers — Save 0 to 100 mph (0 to 160 km/h). NOTE:
 60 ft (20 m) ET The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake 5
 With a USB jump drive installed, press the USB button pedal is released or the parking brake is engaged, before
Displays the time it takes the vehicle to go
to save to the jump drive. the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
60 feet (20 m).
 Press the Uconnect button to save the runs to the  Brake from mph (km/h)
 330 ft (100 m) ET
Owner’s web page.
Displays the time it takes the vehicle to go Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
NOTE: 330 feet (100 m). brake pedal is pressed.
Uconnect option will be grayed out or missing if the vehicle  ⅛ Mile (200 m) ET NOTE:
does not have a valid Uconnect account associated with it.
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go Brake Distance and Speed timers only display "ready"
 Press the Cancel button to return to the Timers page. ⅛ mile (200 m). when the vehicle is traveling at greater than 30 mph
The tabs on the Timers page contain the timers listed:  ⅛ Mile (200 m) mph (48 km/h).
 Reaction Time Displays the vehicle speed at the time ⅛ mile (200 m)
Measures the driver's reaction time for launching the was reached.
vehicle against a simulated drag strip timing light
(behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree)
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
152 MULTIMEDIA
GAUGES  Boost Pressure — If Equipped G-F ORCE

Shows actual boost pressure.
 Air Fuel Ratio — If Equipped
Shows current air fuel ratio.
 I/C Coolant Temp — If Equipped
Shows actual I/C Coolant temperature.
 Intake Air Temp
Shows actual air intake temperature.
If a gauge is selected, the Gauge Detail View page will
appear on the screen. This page shows gauge values for
the previous two minutes on the selected gauge.
Pressing the Left and Right arrows will cycle through the
details for each of the gauges. Pressing the minimize
button above the graph will return to the gauge menu.
Performance Pages — Gauges Performance Pages — G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the following values: When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values
 Oil Temperature as well as steering angle.
Shows the actual oil temperature. When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
 Oil Pressure available:
Shows the actual oil pressure.  Vehicle Speed:
 Coolant Temperature Measures the current speed of the vehicle in either
Shows the actual coolant temperature. mph or km/h, starting at zero with no maximum value.
 Battery Voltage  Front G-Force:
Shows actual battery voltage. Measures the peak braking force on the front of the
 Trans Oil Temp — If Equipped with an Automatic vehicle.
Transmission
Shows actual transmission oil temperature. Gauge Detail View Page
MULTIMEDIA 153
 Right G-Force: ENGINE DYNAMOMETER (D YNO)

Measures the peak force on the right side of the
vehicle.
 Left G-Force:
Measures the peak force on the left side of the vehicle.
 Rear G-Force:
Measures the peak acceleration force on the rear of
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Front, Right, Left, and Rear G-Forces are all peak values.
These readings can be reset by clearing peak G-Force on
the instrument cluster.
 Steering Wheel Angle
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor 5
to measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to
zero (straight ahead) reference angle. The zero degree
Performance Pages — Engine Performance Pages — Dyno
reference angle measurement indicates a steering When selected, this screen displays the following values: The system will start drawing graphs for Power and Torque
wheel straight ahead position. (top chart) and Engine Speed (bottom chart). The graph
 Vehicle Speed
The friction circle display shows instantaneous G-Force as will fill to the right side of the page (based on History time
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
a highlight and previous G-Force as dots within the circle. selected). Once the right side of the page is reached, the
 Engine Power graph will scroll with the right side always being the most
The system records previous G-Force for three minutes. If
Shows the instantaneous power. recent recorded sample.
there are multiple samples at a given point, the color of
the dot will darken from blue to red. Vectors more frequent  Engine Torque
will show in red; infrequent vectors will show in blue. Shows the instantaneous torque.
 Oil Pressure (6.4L Only) — If Equipped
Shows the actual engine oil pressure.
 Boost Pressure (6.2L Only) — If Equipped
Shows the actual boost pressure.
 Gear (Automatic Transmission Only)
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the
vehicle.
154 MULTIMEDIA
The following options can be selected: You will be able to enable, disable, and customize the Pressing the Drive Mode Set-Up button on the
 Pressing the STOP button will freeze the graph. functionality of the Launch Control and Performance touchscreen within the Performance Control screen
Selecting Play will clear the graph and restart the Control Set-Up features within Performance Control. indicates the real-time status of the various systems.
process over. To access information about the functionality of these Pressing the Sport Mode Set-Up, Drag Mode Set-Up
features through the Uconnect system, press the Info (1320 only), or Default Mode Set-Up buttons on the
 Press the + or - buttons to change the history of the
button on the touchscreen. touchscreen allows the driver to configure their individual
graph. The selectable options are “30”, “60”, “90”, and
performance control and see how those configurations
“120” seconds. The graph will expand or constrict NOTE: affect the performance of the vehicle.
depending on the setting selected.
Dodge vehicles equipped with a 6.4L engine, except for
 Select the “Gear” display setting to turn the graph gear R/T Scat Pack 1320 6.4L non-widebody vehicles, will use NOTE:
markers on and off for automatic transmission vehicles SRT Drive Modes rather than the Dodge Performance Not all of the options listed in this manual are available on
only. Control Pages. Please refer to the following sections for every vehicle. Here is a chart with all available Perfor-
mance Control vehicle configurations:
NOTE: further information on the SRT Drive Modes.
The Gear on/off feature will only display if your vehicle is
Drive Mode Set-Up Available Mode Configurations
equipped with an Automatic Transmission.
Engine If Manual Transmission
DODGE DRIVE MODES — IF EQUIPPED Engine/Transmission If Auto Transmission

Steering X
PERFORMANCE C ONTROL — Paddle Shifters If Auto Transmission
I F EQUIPPED Traction Control X
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Performance Control Suspension If Adaptive Suspension
feature which allows for coordinating the operation of
various vehicle systems depending upon the type of
Refer to the Sport and Default Modes for their detailed
driving behavior desired. The Performance Control feature
operation.
is controlled through the Uconnect system and may be
accessed by performing any of the following: NOTE:
 Pushing the Super Track Pack button on the instru- These settings will remain in effect when using the Launch
ment panel switch bank. Performance Control Set-Up Control feature.
 Selecting “Performance Control” from the Apps menu.
 Selecting “Performance Control” from within the
Performance Pages menu.
MULTIMEDIA 155
Default Mode
Default Mode Set-Up Launch Control

5
Default Mode
Launch Control This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that
is designed to allow the driver to achieve quick, consistent
The vehicle will always start in Default Mode. This mode is WARNING! vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
for typical driving conditions. While in Default Mode, the form of traction control that manages tire slip while
Engine, Transmission and Traction will operate in their Launch Control is intended for off-highway or off-road launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
Normal settings and cannot be changed. The Steering use only and should not be used on any public during race events on a closed course where consistent
Assist may be configured to “Normal”, “Sport”, or roadways. It is recommended that this feature be used quarter-mile and 0-to-60 times are desired. The system is
“Comfort” by pressing the corresponding button on the in a controlled environment, and within the limits of the not intended to compensate for lack of driver experience
touchscreen. The Paddle Shifters (if equipped) may be law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the or familiarity with the race track. Use of this feature in low
enabled or disabled while in this mode. performance pages must never be exploited in a traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may result in
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize excess wheel slip outside this system’s control resulting in
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, an aborted launch.
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
156 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Sport Mode is a configuration setup for typical enthusiast ENGINE/TRANS (IF EQUIPPED WITH
driving. The Transmission and Steering are both set to AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)
 Launch Control should not be used on public roads.
their Sport settings. The steering wheel Paddle switches
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
are enabled. Traction Control defaults to Normal. Any of
area.
these four settings may be changed to the driver’s
 Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles preferences by pressing the buttons on the touchscreen.
(805 km) of the vehicle’s life. Push the Sport button on the instrument panel switch
 Launch Control should only be used when the engine bank to put the vehicle in Sport Mode and activate these
and transmission are at operating temperature. settings. The customized settings will only be active when
 Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved the Sport button is active.
road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces
may cause damage to vehicle components and is not
recommended.
 Launch Control is not available in ESC Full Off Mode.
Sport Mode
Engine/Trans
 SPORT
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen for
improved throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience.
 NORMAL
Press the Normal button on the touchscreen for a
Sport Mode Set-Up balance of throttle response, shift comfort and
Possible Performance Control configurations are listed economy for normal driving.
with accompanying descriptions. The information
contained in the following list can also be accessed from
within the mode Set-Up menus. To access the information,
Sport Mode press the Info button on the touchscreen from the mode
Set-Up menu, and use the Left/Right arrows to toggle
through available descriptions. The title for each system in
the Set-Up menu can be pressed, which provides the
descriptions for each function of that system.
MULTIMEDIA 157
PADDLE SHIFTERS — IF EQUIPPED WITH TRACTION STEERING — IF EQUIPPED

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
5
Traction Control Steering
Paddle Shifters – Automatic Transmission  SPORT  SPORT
 ON Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to turn off Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to provide
Press the On button on the touchscreen to enable traction control and reduce stability control. an increased amount of steering feel, requiring a
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.  NORMAL higher amount of steering effort.
 OFF Press the Normal button on the touchscreen to provide  NORMAL
Press the Off button on the touchscreen to disable full traction control and full stability control. Press the Normal button on the touchscreen to provide
steering wheel Paddle Shifters. a balanced steering feel and steering effort. This is also
your vehicle’s preset steering setting.
 COMFORT
Press the Comfort button on the touchscreen to
provide a lower steering effort.
158 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES REGULATORY AND SAFETY The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in I NFORMATION recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from scientific community.
US/CANADA
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
performance does not satisfactorily improve from far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits. emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from some situations or environments, such as aboard
operation when not using the Uconnect system. the human body. airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio Ú page 284.
159
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may WARNING!
result in degraded ABS performance.
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS)  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake WARNING! manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
performance under most braking conditions. The system  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip- safety of others.
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
control during braking. by improperly installed or high output radio transmit- Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of Light
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight such equipment should be performed by qualified The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. professionals. is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
The ABS is activated during braking when the system as four seconds.
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
 Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
6
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or system is not functioning and that service is required.
likelihood of the ABS activating. stop. However, the conventional brake system will continue to
You also may experience the following normal operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
characteristics when the ABS activates: from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
 ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
to hear for a short time after the stop) by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
 Brake pedal pulsations traction afforded. on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
 A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
160 SAFETY
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) WARNING!

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
SYSTEM The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS). capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
stability and control in various driving conditions. could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
others. roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB) and Rain Brake Support (RBS). NOTE:
Brake Assist System (BAS) Brake System Warning Light ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode
(if equipped). For a complete explanation of the available
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for ESC modes, see Ú page 161.
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing as long as four seconds.
WARNING!
the rate and amount of brake application and then applies If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock functioning properly and that immediate service is and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
of the system, you must apply continuous braking have the light repaired as soon as possible. roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump” capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
released, the BAS is deactivated. between the front and rear axles by limiting braking others.
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip
of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) before the front axle.
SAFETY 161
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ESC Operating Modes

WARNING!
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the system may have multiple operating modes.
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing ESC On
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the
previously mentioned conditions. Engine power may also road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. including those resulting from excessive speed in the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro- This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
 Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
appropriate for the steering wheel position. from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
 Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
appropriate for the steering wheel position. Partial Off
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabil-
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle ities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the others. allowed.
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC
 Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
or understeer condition.
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate. 6
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC WARNING!
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of ESC
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed modification or poor vehicle maintenance that section) has been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator
and driving to the prevailing road conditions. reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled,
rollover, personal injury and death. and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is reduced.
162 SAFETY
NOTE: The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that the

WARNING! Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a reduced
 For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push
mode.
and release of the switch will toggle the ESC modes.  The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
Multiple attempts may be required to return to "ESC the natural laws of physics from acting on the
On" mode. vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by NOTE:
 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
 The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
system is in the “Partial Off” mode. accidents, including those resulting from excessive
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
 If Equipped — "ESC Sport" and "ESC Track" are ESC speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
time the ignition is placed in the ON position.
“Partial Off” mode(s). hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
 Each time the ignition is placed in the ON position, the
Full Off – If Equipped ESC system will be on even if it was turned off
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light previously.
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this And ESC OFF Indicator Light  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To enter the when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC OFF button for five
in the instrument cluster will come on when the that caused the ESC activation.
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
ignition is placed in the ON mode. It should go
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC
out with the engine running. If the ESC Hill Start Assist (HSA)
OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button.
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the
WARNING! driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than throttle before this time expires, the system will release
 In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc- 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
tion and stability features are disabled. Therefore, possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. normal.
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
the ESC system will not engage to assist in main- becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
taining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
off-highway or off-road use only. Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
(Continued) during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
SAFETY 163
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to Disabling And Enabling HSA Rain Brake Support (RBS)
activate:
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the RBS may improve braking performance in wet conditions.
 The feature must be enabled. current setting, proceed as follows: It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure
 The vehicle must be stopped. to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
 The parking brake must be off. Ú page 107. functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
 The driver door must be closed. speed. When RBS is active, there is no notification to the
 The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. Towing With HSA driver and no driver interaction is required.
 The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle towing a trailer.
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when
 HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. WARNING! an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
 If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough system for a panic stop.
remain active.
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
Traction Control System (TCS)
WARNING! trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the 6
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce
as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while the brake pedal. engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be  HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking (BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
objects, and most importantly brake operation to to place the transmission in PARK. on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road  Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli- system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
conditions. Your complete attention is always required sion or serious personal injury. allow more engine power to be applied to the wheel that is
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision ESC are in reduced modes.
or serious personal injury.
164 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS Automatic Transmission Vehicles

The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
NOTE:
 The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — any forward gear or NEUTRAL. rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
Manual Transmission Vehicles detection zones.
I F EQUIPPED  The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the rear your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
any gear selector position, except REVERSE.
fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable vehicles the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM Warning Light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
 The BSM system may experience dropouts (blinking on
and off) of the side mirror warning indicator lamps
when a motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more
than a couple of seconds).
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice and
BSM Warning Light
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia/
Rear Detection Zones width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone bumper where the radar sensors are located with foreign
length starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
let the driver know that the system is operational. zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
SAFETY 165
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud, or The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
other road contaminations accumulate on the rear fascia/ detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
bumper where the radar sensors are located. The system located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
may also detect blockage if the vehicle is operated in audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
areas with extremely low radar returns such as a desert or Ú page 167.
parallel to a large elevation drop. If a blockage is detected,
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
Corners” message will display in the cluster, both mirror
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will not
during these types of zone entries.
occur. This is normal operation. The system will
automatically recover and resume function when the Entering From The Side
condition clears. To minimize system blockage, do not Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Rear Monitoring
block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the radar side of the vehicle.
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, Overtaking Traffic
bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of
contaminations.
less than 15 mph (24 km/h)), the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two
vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning 6
light will not illuminate.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Sensor Location Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
Overtaking/Approaching
166 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on Rear Cross Path — If Equipped
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
does not require service. may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed.
The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and, if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the
driver.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
Overtaking/Passing is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
adjacent lanes Ú page 284.
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
RCP Detection Zones
injury or death. RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alerts,
including reducing the radio volume so that the alert can
be better heard.
SAFETY 167
NOTE: Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW)

In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
OPERATION — I F EQUIPPED
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
not be able to alert the driver. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to warnings and visual warnings (within the instrument
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible cluster display) to warn the driver when it detects a
WARNING! chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended to
detected object are present on the same side at the same provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In mitigate the potential collision.
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
reduced so that the alert can be better heard. NOTE:
must be careful when backing up, even when using FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with sensors as well as the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is system, to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio When the system determines that a forward collision is
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious volume is reduced so that the alert can be better heard. probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
injury or death. Blind Spot Alert Off visual warnings.
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual 6
Modes Of Operation or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation that NOTE:

are available in the Uconnect system. The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system used.
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in RCP mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object
is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the
radio volume is reduced so that the alert can be better FCW Message
heard.
168 SAFETY
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in The Forward Collision activation/deactivation is located in NOTE:
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message "Uconnect Settings" under "Safety And Driving The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of FCW
will be deactivated Ú page 284. Assistance". Forward Collision can be checked or possible collision warnings experienced.
unchecked.
NOTE: NOTE:
When FCW is selected off, there will be an "FCW OFF" icon
 The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph that appears in the instrument cluster display.  The system will retain the last setting selected by the
(10 km/h). driver after ignition shut down.
 The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than Changing the FCW status to off prevents the system from
 FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based on the warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of of you.
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
normal FCW activation and functionality. NOTE: oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
 The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the The FCW system’s default state is on. The FCW system higher rate of speed.
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next.  FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the If the system is turned off, it will remain off when the screens.
surroundings. vehicle is restarted.
Service FCW Warning
WARNING! Changing FCW Status If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
The FCW Sensitivity settings are programmable through reads:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
the Uconnect system Ú page 107.  ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting in the “On”  Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the setting. This allows the system to warn you of a possible This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
warning could lead to serious injury or death. farther away and it applies limited braking. This gives you the system checked by an authorized dealer.
the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
NOTE: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
Turning FCW On Or Off
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW (TPMS)
NOTE: possible collision warnings experienced.
The default status of FCW is on; this allows the system to The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
you.
in front of you when you are much closer. This setting
provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
SAFETY 169
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi NOTE:
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be CAUTION!
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the  Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire TPMS Warning Light off. become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F checked.
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase as the
(186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
vehicle is driven — this is normal and there should be no
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
adjustment for this increased pressure.
(158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to could damage the TPMS sensor.
See Ú page 253 on how to properly inflate the turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may
vehicle’s tires. cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the (186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. NOTE:
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only
 The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
pressure loss through the tire. cold placard pressure value Ú page 284.
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
6
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire  The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn CAUTION! while adjusting your tire pressure, unless your vehicle
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended  The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip- is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert (TFA) system.
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning  Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the have been established for the tire size equipped on tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system damage may result when using replacement equip- may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light will ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.  The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
turn off once the system receives the updated tire The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on after- nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to market wheels and may contribute to a poor overall correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the system performance or sensor damage. Customers gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
TPMS to receive this information. are encouraged to use Original Equipment Manufac- to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
turer (OEM) wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature  Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
operation. sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
(Continued) sure in the tire.
170 SAFETY
Premium System NOTE:

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure TPMS Warning Light off.
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components: Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
 Receiver module Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
 Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, shown in a different color in the instrument cluster
which display in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light pressure inflation value as shown in the “Inflate to XX”
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
message. Once the system receives the updated tire
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low pressures, the system will automatically update, the Service Tire Pressure System Warning
Pressure Warnings graphic display in the instrument cluster will change color
back to the original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off for
instrument cluster and a chime will sound turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
four active road tires. In addition, the TPMS to receive this information.
display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a
instrument cluster will display an “Inflate to XX” message minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
with the low tire pressure values shown in a different color. being received.
SAFETY 171
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash
longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash, on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be
and the "Service Tire Pressure System" message will no In addition, the instrument cluster will display a deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of “Service Tire Pressure System” message for five (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not
the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel
following: pressure value. and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
as the TPMS sensors for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then,
instrument cluster will display a “Service Tire drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).
 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
Pressure System” message for five seconds and then The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
wheel housings
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The
 Using tire chains on the vehicle instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire Pressure
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and System” message and then display dashes (--) in place of
Vehicles With Compact Spare reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact the pressure values.
spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring System will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster longer chime or display the “Service Tire Pressure System” 6
sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the will display a new pressure value instead of dashes message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
pressure in the compact or non-matching full size (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the remain in place of the pressure values.
spare tire. low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next TPMS to receive this information. above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
ignition key cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “Service
the instrument cluster will still display a different Tire Pressure System” message and then display pressure
color pressure value and an "Inflate to XX" message. values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle
the "Service Tire Pressure System" message will no longer
be displayed as long as no system fault exists.
172 SAFETY
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child WARNING!
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
are the restraint systems: seating position Ú page 185. air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT SYSTEMS child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
FEATURES move the seat as far back as possible and use the restraint.
proper child restraint Ú page 185.
 Seat Belt Systems  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
them or under their arm. restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
 Child Restraints
5. You should read the instructions provided with your a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
Some of the safety features described in this section may restraint in that vehicle.
be standard equipment on some models, or may be child restraint to make sure that you are using it
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an properly.
authorized dealer. 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and SEAT BELT S YSTEMS
shoulder belts properly.
I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
Please pay close attention to the information in this and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system bags room to inflate.
happen far away from home or on your own street.
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
possible. has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
risk of harm from a deploying air bag: occupants and the door and occupants could be
injured. the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
seat. modified to accommodate a disabled person, see times.
Ú page 280 for customer service contact
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat,
information.
FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow
children 12 years old and under to ride in your
vehicle.
SAFETY 173
Vehicles Without Passenger Seating Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
WARNING!
Installed (BeltAlert)
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
If your vehicle does not have a factory installed front Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
passenger seat and/or rear passenger seats, the features BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
this area are more likely to be seriously injured or
described in this section may not be available in your driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
killed.
vehicle. equipped with outboard front passenger seat
This vehicle has been designed to maximize total  Only ride in available seating positions equipped with BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
performance. The passenger seats may be deleted, which seat belt systems. Always properly wear your seat BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is
may affect the NVH (Noise, Vibration, and Harshness) belt. Failure to do so could result in an increased risk in the START or ON/RUN position.
characteristics. As a result, the vehicle may be louder of serious injury or death in the event of an accident.
Initial Indication
overall. Furthermore, the passenger seats and seat belts  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
systems are deleted. If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
WARNING! not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
tions to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
 If the passenger and/or rear seats have been is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
the event of a crash.
removed, do not ride in those areas. In a collision, or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn 6
people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-  All occupants, including the driver, should not on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
ously injured or killed. operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat if the head buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
restraints are not in place of their proper positions in not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
 If this vehicle was not factory equipped with a
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event unoccupied.
passenger seat, NEVER attempt to install a
of a crash. BeltAlert Warning Sequence
passenger seat because the safety systems,
including the air bags and seat belt, may not properly  Head restraints should never be adjusted while the The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
protect you. vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
(Continued) restraints improperly adjusted or removed could and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
cause serious injury or death in the event of a unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
collision. seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime.
174 SAFETY
Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Lap/Shoulder Belts
Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts WARNING!
are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied
seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver,
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air
driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize
belts. shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.
Change Of Status under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your inju-
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. ries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt.
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert WARNING! Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are and to keep your passengers safe, too.
buckled again.  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe
injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat  Two people should never be belted into a single seat
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active belt. People belted together can crash into one another
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person,
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when though you have air bags.
no matter what their size.
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that  In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passen-
and cargo is properly stowed. gers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
WARNING!
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up prop-  A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating erly. in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the
BeltAlert.  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
NOTE: as low as possible and keep it snug.
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle  A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. (Continued) can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
(Continued)
SAFETY 175
WARNING! WARNING!
 A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju- belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
nearest you. diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
 A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
your seat belt snugly.
Program facility for inspection. Pulling Out The Latch Plate
 A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder adjust the seat.
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
6
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
 A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to belt to go around your lap.
be used together.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

176 SAFETY
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove WARNING!
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.  ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a anchor point.
worn, the distance between the front edge of the
collision. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occu-
plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing 180 pant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.  Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-
the latch plate. mended seating positions. Remove and store the
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Seat Belt Extender Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
Positioning The Lap Belt the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the must be removed.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
SAFETY 177
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
(ALR)
they are wearing a seat belt. The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place Ú page 192.
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack Rear Seat Delete — Only Front Passenger Seat Available
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: 6
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Vehicle With Rear Seating
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed
air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature Passenger Seats Deleted — No Automatic Locking Retractor
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an (ALR) Locations
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
178 SAFETY
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S YSTEMS
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the (SRS)
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the 2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted. All passenger occupants within the vehicle must be in a
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
seat equipped with a Seat Belt System and Head Restraint
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
for the safety of the passenger.
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. If the front passenger and/or rear seats have been
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the removed do not ride in those areas.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
buckle until you hear a "click." Some of the safety features described in this section may
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it be standard equipment on some models, or may be
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) authorized dealer.
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
locking mode.
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly WARNING!
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.  The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the associated with the electrical Air Bag System
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
WARNING! feature or any other seat belt function is not working following Air Bag System Components:
properly when checked according to the procedures
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
in the Service Manual.
Air Bag System Components
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or  Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child increase the risk of injury in collisions.  Air Bag Warning Light
restraint.  Steering Wheel and Column
 Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front  Instrument Panel
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only  Knee Impact Bolsters
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
restraint in that vehicle. child.  Supplemental Side Air Bags
 Front and Side Impact Sensors
 Seat Belt Pretensioners
 Seat Track Position Sensors
SAFETY 179
NOTE: The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
Vehicles with the front passenger seat deleted will not be instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds WARNING!
equipped with the Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Seat Belt for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/ Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
Pretensioner, Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag, RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
and Seat Track Position Sensors for the front passenger. Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
All passenger occupants within the vehicle must be in a
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
seat equipped with a Seat Belt System and Head Restraint
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
for the safety of the passenger.
startup. system immediately.
If the front passenger and/or rear seats have been
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
removed do not ride in those areas.
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
Air Bag Warning Light detected that could affect the air bag system. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance detected, which could affect the Supplemental
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
of the air bag system whenever the ignition
dealer service the air bag system immediately. Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC  The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will 6
not inflate. the ON/RUN position. sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
 The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power eight-second interval.
 The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. service the vehicle immediately Ú page 63.
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
180 SAFETY
Front Air Bags This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
WARNING! passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are  Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver Advanced Front Air Bags.
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
bag covers. seat position.
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child WARNING!
restraint.  No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child inflate.
restraint in that vehicle.  Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag bags may no longer be functional. The protective
Front Air Bags/Knee Impact Bolster Locations Features covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver only when the air bags are inflating.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster appropriate to the severity and type of collision as severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
which may receive information from the front impact sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
sensors (if equipped) or other system components. seat belts even though you have air bags.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
SAFETY 181
Front Air Bag Operation Knee Impact Bolsters

Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags driver and front passenger, and position the front
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce WARNING!
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.  Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little  Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
deceleration. radios, etc. Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
Supplemental Side Air Bags deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted speed and with such a high force that it could injure 6
Side Air Bags (SABs). occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
position, away from an inflating air bag. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
WARNING!
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
inflate the front air bags. The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
structure. pushed into you, causing serious injury.
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The
front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
182 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). certain side impact events. collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) WARNING! or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”  Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows blink your eyes.
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions. WARNING!
 In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not  Occupants, including children, who are up against or
install any accessory items in your vehicle which very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket killed. Occupants, including children, should never
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the in an infant or child restraint.
roof of the vehicle for any reason.  Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label
Side Impacts They also help keep you in position, away from an
Location inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) belts properly and sit upright with their backs against
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
provided by the seat belts and body structure. severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the size of the child.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
air bag. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
SAFETY 183
In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near If A Deployment Occurs

WARNING! rollover event, and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
 Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean after deployment.
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete NOTE:
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
 Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy- certain rollover or side impact events. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. system.
Air Bag System Components
 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work NOTE: or all of the following may occur:
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the  The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
wear your seat belt even though you have Side with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below: deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
Air Bags.  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
 Air Bag Warning Light
NOTE: with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
 Steering Wheel and Column
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but  Instrument Panel cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
6
they will open during air bag deployment.
 Knee Impact Bolsters see your doctor immediately.
Rollover Events  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags  As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to  Seat Belt Buckle Switch particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint  Supplemental Side Air Bags process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a  Front and Side Impact Sensors bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the  Seat Belt Pretensioners skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita-
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
 Seat Track Position Sensors
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
seat belt pretensioners should have deployed. NOTE: see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
Vehicles with the front passenger seat deleted will not be clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
equipped with the Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Seat Belt tions for cleaning.
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
Pretensioner, Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag,
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
and Seat Track Position Sensors for the front passenger.
whether deployment is appropriate.
184 SAFETY
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these Enhanced Accident Response System
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
be in place to protect you. Response System:
Reset Procedure
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
WARNING! Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot  Cut off battery power to the:
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat  Engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor  Electric Motor (if equipped) compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer and starting the engine.
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint  Electric power steering
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
Controller System serviced as well.  Brake booster
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
 Electric park brake towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have
NOTE:  Automatic transmission gear selector the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
 Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,  Horn Maintaining Your Air Bag System
but they will open during air bag deployment.  Front wiper
 After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an WARNING!
authorized dealer immediately. NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the  Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
Enhanced Accident Response System STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
In the event of an impact, if the communication network ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment not modify the components or wiring, including
on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec- the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/
following functions: trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
system by following the procedure described below. If you side steps or running boards.
 Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
 Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped).  It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power. system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
 Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter- (Continued)
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
 Unlock the power door locks.
SAFETY 185
These data can help provide a better understanding of the

WARNING! circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. WARNING!
 Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag NOTE: In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
not function properly if modifications are made. Take crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR even an infant on your lap could become so great that
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
system service. If your seat, including your trim cover name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. are. The child and others could be badly injured or
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying proper restraint for the child’s size.
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is There are different sizes and types of restraints for
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In children from newborn size to the child almost large
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
authorized dealer.
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
Event Data Recorder (EDR) instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
CHILD R ESTRAINTS
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
6
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or times, including babies and children. Every state in the Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding United States, and every Canadian province, requires that a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. it in the vehicle where you will use it.
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled NOTE:
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: up in a rear seat, if available.
 For additional information, refer to http://
 How various systems in your vehicle were operating; According to crash statistics, children are safer when www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
 Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the 1–888–327–4236
were buckled/fastened; front.  Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
 How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler- If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC website for additional information: http://
ator and/or brake pedal; and, recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not child-car-seat-safety.html
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in
these positions.
186 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
Infants and Toddlers not reached the height or weight limits of their child
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or who have
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
restraint
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
Larger Children restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
height or weight limit of their booster seat
NOTE: The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It

If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC is recommended for children from birth until they reach WARNING!
recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not child seats can be used either rear-facing or air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
these positions. If you must install a forward facing child have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat, then you must use infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by restraint.
the seat belt system to secure the restraint. A top tether children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
strap extension may be needed to reach the tether anchor less than at least two years old. Children should remain  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
on the rear shelf directly behind the passenger seat. rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
allowed by their convertible child seat. restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
Infant And Child Restraints a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in restraint in that vehicle.
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
SAFETY 187
Older Children And Child Restraints Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can
WARNING! use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
NOTE:
 Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. the vehicle seat?
recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the
when installing an infant or child restraint. way back?
these positions. If you must install a forward facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat, then you must use  After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
the seat belt system to secure the restraint. A top tether not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward between the neck and arm?
strap extension may be needed to reach the tether anchor because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
on the rear shelf directly behind the passenger seat. 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible  When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
children who are over two years old or who have outgrown remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. 6
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as personal injury. position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
child seat. booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
All children whose weight or height is above the Children Too Large For Booster Seats
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a NOTE: WARNING!
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not will not protect a child properly, which may result in
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the these positions. the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
vehicle by the seat belt.
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat.
188 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not present
in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these positions.
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

Combined Weight of
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower
LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Tether
Restraint Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Tether
Anchors Only Anchor
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Forward-Facing Child
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Restraint
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage LATCH Positions For Installing Child
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
(LATCH) Restraint System Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
Restraints In This Vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the WARNING!
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top If the rear or front passenger seats are not present in
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped positions.
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
LATCH Label information.
SAFETY 189
Vehicles Without Rear Seating Installed

If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear passenger seat,
your vehicle is not equipped with LATCH anchorages. If
your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC
and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not
these positions. If you must install a forward facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat, then you must use
the seat belt system to secure the restraint. A top tether
strap extension may be needed to reach the tether anchor
on the rear shelf directly behind the passenger seat. Vehicle With Rear Seating — LATCH Positions For Installing Rear Seat Delete — No LATCH Positions In This Vehicle
Child Restraints Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
WARNING!
Lower Anchorage Symbol
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or 6
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
Passenger Seats Deleted — No LATCH Positions In This Vehicle

190 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach 65 lb (29.5 kg) (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the child restraint? the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lb (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
child restraint.
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child No
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
restraint?
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
No LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
lower LATCH anchorage?
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
Yes
front passenger seat? contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
SAFETY 191
Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
WARNING! WARNING! have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
If the rear or front passenger seats are not present in If the rear or front passenger seats are not present in Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
positions. positions. tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
The lower anchorages are round bars that are There are tether strap anchorages behind each
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it rear seating position located in the panel Center Seat LATCH
meets the seatback, below the anchorage between the rear seatback and the rear
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible window. They are found under a plastic cover
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child with the tether anchorage symbol on it.
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
6
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. For typical installation
instructions, see Ú page 192.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint

manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
Tether Strap Anchorages child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
LATCH Anchorages
192 SAFETY
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by Installing Child Restraints Using The
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
Restraint path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
Vehicle Seat Belt
If the selected seating position has a Switchable in any direction. NOTE:
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC
belt, following the instructions below. See Ú page 192 to How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old
check what type of seat belt each seating position has. (ALR) Seat Belt: and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used these positions.
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle by other occupants or being used to secure child Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
anchorages. restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before lap/shoulder belt.
for that seating position. If the second row seat can installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the WARNING!
head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
position to make room for the child seat. You may
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
are not toys and that they should not play with them. restraint.
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
WARNING! seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position. restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
 Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The
restraint in that vehicle.
the top tether anchorage. See Ú page 195 for child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
directions to attach a tether anchor. restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.  Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
Remove slack in the straps according to the child only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
SAFETY 193
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing

WARNING!
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
 Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The NOTE:
child could be badly injured or killed. If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in
these positions.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat Rear Seat Delete — Only Front Passenger Seat Available
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the 6
retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description on Ú page 177 for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for Vehicle With Rear Seating
more information. ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Passenger Seats Deleted — No Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) Locations
194 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat Weight limit of the Child Restraint install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the
belt to attach a forward-facing child restraint? recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
Yes restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
front passenger seat?
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
No
against the belt path of the child restraint? ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you against the child seat.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
(ALR): (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
lap/shoulder belt. room for the child seat. You may also move the front retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
WARNING! 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
 Improper installation or failure to properly secure a restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The path.
child could be badly injured or killed.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions hear a “click.”
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
SAFETY 195
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is 3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
locked, you should not be able to pull out any WARNING! for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
lap portion around the child restraint while you push possible, route the tether strap under the head
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
the child restraint rearward and downward into the restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
vehicle seat. lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
that is approved for that seating position, located
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the behind the top of the vehicle seat. For the location of
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect approved tether anchorages in your vehicle, see
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the Ú page 188.
tether strap. For directions to attach a tether anchor,
see Ú page 195.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 6
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward Tether Strap Mounting
Tether Anchorage: to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If 2 — Cover
there is no top tether anchorage for that seating 3 — Attaching Strap
WARNING! position, move the child restraint to another position
A — Tether Strap Hook
in the vehicle if one is available.
If the rear or front passenger seats are not present in B — Tether Anchor
your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
positions. behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint. 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
196 SAFETY
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC WARNING! WARNING!
recommends that you do not allow children 12 years old  Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi- It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible
and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear seats are not cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in serious injury or death. be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
these positions. If you must install a forward facing child related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
restraint in the front passenger seat, then you must use  It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, control could occur that may result in an accident
the seat belt system to secure the restraint. A top tether inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people involving serious injury or death.
strap extension may be needed to reach the tether anchor riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
on the rear shelf directly behind the passenger seat. injured or killed.
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE
WARNING! that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. I NSIDE THE VEHICLE
 An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
increased head motion and possible injury to the using a seat belt properly. Seat Belts
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
strap. TRANSPORTING P ETS replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
 If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, system.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a questions regarding the seat belt or retractor conditions,
in the strap. collision. take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
inspection.
SAFETY TIPS pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts. Air Bag Warning Light
TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS CONNECTED VEHICLES The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept mode. If the light is either not on during
information and private communications without your starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual or possible.
Ú page 70.
SAFETY 197
After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has been WARNING! WARNING!
detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If the
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately
install your floor mat upside down or turn moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
Ú page 172. your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
Defroster mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a of vehicle control.
regular basis.
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to  ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing the position of the floor mat and may cause interfer-
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
inoperable. an additional floor mat on top of an
 If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
existing floor mat.
Floor Mat Safety Information re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
 ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor pedals then re-install the floor mats. 6
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the  It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
vehicle.
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
operation of your vehicle in other ways.  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s your floor mat has been properly installed and is
side floor area. To check for interference, with the secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
WARNING! vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully by lightly pulling mat.
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: trunk.
(Continued)
 ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
(Continued)
198 SAFETY
PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD EXHAUST GAS Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
WARNING! damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
Tires exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects Breathing it can make you unconscious and can seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. these safety tips: inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.  Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS
Lights vehicle in or out of the area.
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and  If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ WARNING!
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
panel. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
monoxide poisoning:
Door Latches  If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
 Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
Fluid Leaks blower at high speed.
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline is stopped in an open area with the engine running
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
immediately. system.
 Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
side windows fully open.
199
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only when your
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard warning for
instrument panel, below the radio. other motorists. WARNING!
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
NOTE: related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may Guardian™ features and applications in this vehicle.
wear down your battery. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian™
services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
Hazard Warning Flashers Button the subscriber Ú page 284. 7
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.  The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
Hazard Warning Flashers. and you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network.
ASSIST And SOS Mirror

200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call  Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call. 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to  The vehicle brand. emergency responders and provide them with
any one of the following support centers: important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
 The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
 Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be
WARNING!
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
connected to a representative for assistance. additional help is needed.  If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you’re or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer-
WARNING!
roadside Assistance. gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the
 SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
support for SiriusXM Guardian™. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
 Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
vehicle issues. related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
 Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio, Guardian™ features and applications in this vehicle.
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
Phone and NAV issues. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian™
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is
SOS Call required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.  The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
NOTE: electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
NOTE: equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be
a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho- may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, rized by the subscriber. initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
push the SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press  Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the operator may be able to open a voice connection CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
Rearview Mirror. with the vehicle to determine if additional help is trical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the
operator should be able to speak with you or other DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
connection to a SOS operator has been made. SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will (Continued)
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit attempt to remain connected with the SOS oper-
the following important vehicle information to a SOS ator until the SOS operator terminates the connec-
operator: tion.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

 Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system  The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
there to help protect you. the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Guardian™ features and applications in this vehicle.
Control system immediately. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian™
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
capabilities. Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not Call system operation. These include, but are not limited NOTE:
answer or respond to SOS system calls. to, the following factors:
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the  The ignition is in the OFF position. the subscriber.
following may occur at the time the malfunction is  The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
 The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
 The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST damaged during a crash. prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate red.  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon- reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
 The Device Screen will display the following message nected during a vehicle crash. an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
“Vehicle device requires service”. Please contact an  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required 7
authorized dealer. Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or for the SOS Call system to function properly.
 An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device obstructed.  Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
requires service”. Please contact an authorized dealer.  Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility. the party responsible for compliance could void the
 Operator error by the SOS operator. user's authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING!
 LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
 Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you CAUTION!
 Weather.
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
service the SOS Call system immediately. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
(Continued) mirror clean.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
WARNING! opposite the jacking position. For example, if the
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the
 The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided passenger’s rear wheel.
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
radio supplement for complete information. vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING pery areas.

experience. PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the Wheel Blocked Example
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the NOTE:
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
changing the wheel.
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating vehicle is being lifted or raised.
the jack or changing the wheel.
 Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. J ACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You 3. Apply the parking brake. The jack, tools and spare tire are stowed under the load
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body 4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic floor in the trunk. Follow the next steps to access the jack
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get transmission) or FIRST gear (manual transmission). and spare tire.
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. NOTE:
The spare tire must be removed in order to access the
 Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on jack.
a jack. 1. Open the trunk.
(Continued)
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
3. Rotate the fastener securing the spare tire counter- 6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from
clockwise to remove it. under the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to WARNING!
loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
 Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
the jack assembly.
jack.
WARNING!  Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a

jack.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.  Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or service center where it can be raised on a lift.
replaced immediately.  Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
J ACKING AND CHANGING A TIRE  If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful

Removing Tire Fastener of motor traffic.
4. Remove the spare tire. WARNING!
5. Rotate the fastener securing the jack counter-
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
clockwise to remove it.
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the 7
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
 Apply the parking brake firmly and place an auto-
matic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission
in REVERSE or FIRST gear.
 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be Jack Warning Label
raised.
(Continued)
Removing Jack Fastener
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to

CAUTION! loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
Instructions for this vehicle. Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are
critical. See the following images for proper jacking lo-
cations.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
NOTE: Front Lifting Point
When the following label is present, the spare tire must be
used for the rear wheel(s) only. For a flat front tire, you
must first install the spare on one of the rear tires. Then,
follow the jacking instructions for front tire replacement
and replace the front road wheel with the wheel removed
from the rear of the vehicle.
Jack Engagement Locations

4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest
to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
Front Jacking Location
NOTE:
If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the jack
on its side and rotate it up into position.
Spare Tire Label

8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the
WARNING! lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt WARNING!
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
remove the tire. not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire. in serious injury.
7. Mount the spare tire.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
Rear Lifting Point CAUTION! handle counterclockwise.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem 10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
spare tire is mounted incorrectly. leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice
Ú page 273. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base 7
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
tightening down the fastener.
WARNING!
Rear Jacking Location
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
and install the spare tire. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
Mounting Spare Tire places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center
cap or wheel cover on the compact spare Ú page 265.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
Use this QR code to access your digital symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
experience.
 Selecting Air Mode
The Tire Service Kit is located in the Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to
trunk. this position for air pump operation only.
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle trim level, tire
service kit models may vary.  Selecting Sealant Mode
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to
can be sealed with the Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects this position to inject the Tire Service Kit
(e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Sealant and to inflate the tire.
The Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures Tire Service Kit Components
down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).  Using The Power Button
1 — Sealant/Air Hose Push and release the Power Button once to
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to 2 — Hose Accessories turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
3 — Mode Select Knob release the Power Button again to turn Off
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
4 — Pressure Gauge the Tire Service Kit.
5 — Deflation Button  Using The Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes overin-
7 — Sealant Bottle
flated.
8 — Power Plug
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions  You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, WARNING!
 Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the
expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner located in the Accessory Storage Compartment
 If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls,
the wheel.
system. See the Sealant Bottle Replacement in this rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the
section for further information. Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the  Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting source.
 The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
sealant into them.
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace  A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
these components immediately at your original equip-  Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses. or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
ment vehicle dealer. vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
WARNING! provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
 When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material  Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid passengers, and others around you.
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and prop- the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service  Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
erly discarded. Kit. to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
 For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
 Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
the following circumstances:
Tire Service Kit. respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
 The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal  If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires.
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact 7
 If the tire has any sidewall damage. with clothing.
 The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal
punctures on the tires' side walls.  If the tire has any damage from driving with  Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
extremely low tire pressure. case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
 If the tire has any damage from driving on a of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
flat tire. with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
 If the wheel has any damage. induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
(Continued)
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit 3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit: then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant 0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
Hose onto the valve stem. 1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers. off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of NOTE:
the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from 2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as the tire. outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
necessary to place the valve stem in this position Make sure the vehicle is running before turning the
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
before proceeding. Tire Service Kit on.
5. Always start the vehicle before turning the
3. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and 3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use.
Tire Service Kit on.
release the ENGINE START/STOP button to set the Call for assistance.
ignition switch to the OFF position. If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
4. Apply the parking brake. Hose:
6. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit: Sealant Mode position. 4. Continue to operate the pump until sealant
is no longer flowing through hose (typically
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows
from the fitting at the end of the hose. through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge
7. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 bar). The Pressure Gauge
(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle
the deflated tire. will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 bar)
through the Sealant Hose and into the tire.
to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle is
empty.
NOTE: 5. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire. immediately after the Sealant Bottle is empty.
Continue to operate the pump and inflate the
tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on
the tire and loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening. Check the tire pressure by
looking at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within NOTE:
15 minutes: WARNING! If tire has improper inflation follow these next steps:
 The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap
the vehicle further. Call for assistance. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after from the fitting at the end of the hose.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes: (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
next to the deflated tire.
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
NOTE: serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation at an authorized dealer. 3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then screw
pressure before continuing. the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire valve stem.
After Driving:
Service Kit off. 4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug
 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
Hazard Warning Flashers.
 Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
2. Remove the speed limit label from the Tire
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
Service Kit and place sticker on the steering 5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
wheel. end of the hose onto the valve stem.
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and 7
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to 6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the
of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. Air Mode position.
vehicle storage location.  Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle the igni-
Drive Vehicle: tion in the OFF position.
Immediately after injecting sealant and  Apply the parking brake. 7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles Gauge.
(8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar):
the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher: Sealant Bottle Replacement: 4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire 1. Unwrap the power cord.
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the cold tire 2. Unwrap the hose.
inflation pressure found on the tire and
loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button
to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation
pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet. Rotate The Bottle Up
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in 5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
the vehicle.
Hose Location
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire 3. Remove the bottle cover.
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized
dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit. Remove The Bottle
Remove The Bottle Cover

NOTE:
WARNING! ALTERNATE TIRE SERVICE KIT —
 For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps in
As required by current regulations, the information on
I F E QUIPPED
reverse order.
 The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and chemical substances for the protection of human Use this QR code to access your digital
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace health and the environment and on the safe use of the experience.
these components immediately at your original equip- sealing fluid are on the packaging label. Compliance
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm)
ment vehicle dealer. with the indications on the label is an essential
in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire
condition to ensure the safety and effectiveness of the
 Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
product. Remember to carefully read the label before
expiration date (printed on the bottle label) to ensure screws or nails) should not be removed
use. The user of the product is responsible for any
optimum operation of the system. from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be
damages caused by improper use. The sealing fluid has
used in outside temperatures down to
an expiration date. Replace the bottle if the sealant has
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
expired.
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
CAUTION!
Dispose of the bottle and the sealant liquid properly.
Tire Service Kit Storage
Have them disposed of in compliance with national and The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
local regulations.
7
Sealant Bottle Expiration Date Location
Tire Service Kit Location

Tire Service Kit Components And USING THE MODE SELECT KNOB AND HOSES Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Operation Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following  Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. Sealant Hose (4) prior to the expiration date (printed at
 Selecting Air Mode the upper left hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system Ú page 216.
Push in the Mode Select Knob (6) and turn
to this position for air pump operation only.
Use the Black Air Pump Hose (8) when
selecting this mode.
 Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (6) and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit
Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the
Sealant Hose (clear hose) (4) when
selecting this mode.
Tire Service Kit Components  Using The Power Button
1 — Sealant Bottle Push and release the Power Button (3) once
2 — Deflation Button to turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
release the Power Button (3) again to turn
3 — Power Button
Off the Tire Service Kit.  The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (4) are a one
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
 Using The Deflation Button tire application use and need to be replaced after each
5 — Pressure Gauge Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the use. Always replace these components immediately at
6 — Mode Select Knob air pressure in the tire if it becomes overin- your original equipment vehicle dealer.
7 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire flated.  When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
Service Kit) clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material
8 — Air Pump Hose (Black) from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and prop-
erly discarded.
 For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the WARNING!
Tire Service Kit. (A) WHENEVER YOU STOP TO USE TIRE
 If the tire has any damage from driving on a
 You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate flat tire. SERVICE KIT:
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the  If the wheel has any damage. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, Hazard Warning Flashers.
 If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air the wheel. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
Pump Hose (8) and make sure the Mode Select Knob deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
(6) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid  Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (4)
injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant source. and (8) to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire
is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the
 A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your tire. best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
 Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses. vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in
WARNING! in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your this position before proceeding.
 Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the passengers, and others around you. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission)
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road  Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit or in Gear (manual transmission) and place the
to avoid the danger of being hit when using the to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire ignition in the OFF position.
Tire Service Kit. Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, 4. Apply the parking brake. 7
 Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
the following circumstances: respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
 If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. with clothing.
 If the tire has any sidewall damage.  Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
 If the tire has any damage from driving with case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
extremely low tire pressure. cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
(Continued)
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
(B) SETTING UP TO USE TIRE SERVICE KIT:  After pushing the Power Button (3), the sealant (white If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the Hose :
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (6) and turn to the Sealant Hose (4) and into the tire.
Sealant Mode position. 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
NOTE: longer flowing through the hose (typically takes
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (4) and then remove the cap 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
from the fitting at the end of the hose. Sealant Hose (4), the Pressure Gauge (5) can read
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (5)
seconds through the Sealant Hose :
the deflated tire. will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi
1. Push the Power Button (3) to turn Off the Tire (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (4) from Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (4) onto the
the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of
valve stem. 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose (4) to the valve
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (7) and insert the plug into the immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (6) is in the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to
Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the
the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on
Power Button (3) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
NOTE: the driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure).
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from 2. Connect the Power Plug (7) to a different 12 Volt Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure
the tire. power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if Gauge (5).
available. Make sure the engine is running before
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
(C) INJECTING TIRE SERVICE KIT SEALANT turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
pressure within 15 minutes:
INTO THE DEFLATED TIRE: 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.  The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
 Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
Service Kit. NOTE: NOTE:
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (6) is on Air Mode and the pump
Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose (8)
(2) to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL. only, not the Sealant Hose (4).
inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: WARNING!
1. Push the Power Button (3) to turn on Tire Service Kit
1. Push the Power Button (3) to turn off the Tire Service Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the
Kit. the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using tire and loading information label on the driver-side
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until door opening.
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the NOTE:
instrument panel. warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (4) from (2) to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the inflation pressure before continuing.
end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the (E) AFTER DRIVING: 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
vehicle storage location. reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
Pull over to a safe location before continuing Ú page 213.
12 Volt outlet.
CAUTION! 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (6) and turn to the Air
Mode position. 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
 The metal end fitting from Power Plug (7) may get hot the vehicle.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
after use, so it should be handled carefully. 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
 Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (8) (black in color) and service center.
the Sealant Hose (4) can result in sealant contacting screw the fitting at the end of hose on to the valve
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can stem. 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service panel after the tire has been repaired. 7
Kit components which may cause permanent 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (5). 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (4)
damage to the kit. assembly at an authorized dealer as soon as
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): possible.
(D) DRIVE VEHICLE: The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
NOTE:
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
(F) SEALANT BOTTLE AND HOSE REPLACE-

WARNING!
MENT:
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (4) (clear in color).
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant CAUTION!
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly. Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
housing. alternator or electrical system may occur. Remote Jump Starting Post Locations
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (4) aligns with the hose slot in Remote Positive (+) Post
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the NOTE: Remote Negative (-) Post
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
bottle is locked into place. manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
NOTE:
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START The remote battery posts are viewed by standing on the
of the Sealant Hose (4) and return the hose to its right side of the vehicle looking over the fender. The
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump). The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
positive battery post may be covered with a protective cap.
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery
the vehicle. engine compartment for jump starting.
post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off the
remote positive post which has a positive (+) symbol on or
JUMP STARTING around the post.
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump

started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting: J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
1. Apply the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
transmission) or FIRST gear (manual transmission) start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
WARNING! battery.
and cycle the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to CAUTION!
accessories.
battery explosion. Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) battery post. 2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle engine.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park CAUTION!
the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. Failure to follow these procedures could result in 6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnection
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle procedure.
WARNING! or the discharged vehicle.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
establish a ground connection and personal injury 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
could result. the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the the discharged battery.
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster
WARNING! cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. battery. 7
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
blades. cable to the remote negative (-) post (exposed jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the
metallic/unpainted post of the discharge vehicle) vehicle with the discharged battery, and reinstall the
 Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch located directly behind the under-hood fuse box. protective cap.
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. WARNING!
 Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
sparks away from the battery.
personal injury.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle

you should have the battery and charging system WARNING! CAUTION!
inspected at an authorized dealer. Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
CAUTION! see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H),
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery immediately and call for service.
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or In the event it is observed that the temperature gauge is
prevent the engine from starting. moving towards or close to the HOT (H) position, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking the MANUAL PARK RELEASE–8–SPEED
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
appropriate action.
TRANSMISSION
 On the highways — slow down.
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by  In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in WARNING!
an authorized dealer. NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes. Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking
Potential signs of vehicle overheating can be: brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In
 If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
 Temperature gauge is at HOT (H) system adds heat to the engine cooling system and addition, you should be seated in the driver's seat with
 Strong smell of coolant turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
 White smoke coming from engine or exhaust Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park
 You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not
 Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supple-
to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
engine cooling system.
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the 5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the To Reset The Manual Park Release:
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing 1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available. it to the right. side) rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the
To use the Manual Park Release, see the following steps: 6. Pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and lever.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake. rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position. 2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved. down, to its original position, until the locking tab
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
Manual Park Release lever. snaps into place to secure the lever.
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Console Storage Bin Engaging The Lever

Disengaging The Lever 7
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the 3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
tether strap up through the opening in the console lever is locked in its stowed position.
base. 4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. Reinstall the console storage bin.
NOTE:
When the lever is in the release position the access cover
cannot be reinstalled.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE:

For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts between CAUTION!
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the trans- DRIVE / FIRST gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front mission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or damage may result.
and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift REVERSE.
back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE  Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic Stability may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
(with automatic transmission) or FIRST gear and REVERSE
Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode, before rocking It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
(with manual transmission), while gently pressing the
the vehicle Ú page 161. Once the vehicle has been freed, above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
push the ESC OFF button again to restore “ESC On” mode. (no transmission shifting occurring).
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without
spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
WARNING!
CAUTION! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles.
30 seconds continuously without stopping when you
This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts
no matter what the speed.
to free a stuck vehicle.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
If transmission is operable:
 Transmission in NEUTRAL
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if used, same
Front NOT ALLOWED
limitations as previously mentioned)
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED  Ignition in ON/RUN mode
 Transmission in NEUTRAL (NOT in PARK)
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. 7
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery is discharged, find Instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK Ú page 218.
CAUTION!
 Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
 When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
 FCA US LLC does not recommend towing this vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
ALL WHEEL D RIVE (AWD) MODELS — REAR-WHEEL D RIVE (RWD) M ODELS ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
I F EQUIPPED FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four
(EARS)
wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four Response System.
If the transmission and driveline are operable, AWD
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions: This feature is a communication network that takes effect
models can also be towed with the ignition in the ON/RUN
 The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). Instructions in the event of an impact Ú page 184.
mode, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not in PARK!), and
the rear wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) when the
speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST be in the engine is off Ú page 218. EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
ON/RUN mode to tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must  The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
be towed with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the ground (48 km).
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
(e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the key fob is unavailable.  The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be performed under certain crash or near crash-like
CAUTION! towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
 Towing this vehicle using any other method can 30 miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of obstacle Ú page 185.
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case towing is with a flatbed truck.
damage.
CAUTION!
 Damage from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
mentioned requirements can cause severe engine
and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
223
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check engine oil level.
is required for the vehicle. Operating conditions such as
3.6L AND 5.7L ENGINES frequent short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold
 Check windshield washer fluid level.
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Change  Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
These engines are equipped with an automatic oil change damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
scheduled maintenance. 500 miles (805 km).
master cylinder, and power steering (if equipped) and
The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in fill as needed.
the instrument cluster and a single chime will sound,
 Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only
a concern for fleet customers. 8
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Plan — 3.6L And 5.7L

Refer to the maintenance chart for the required
maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System

 Change oil and filter.
 Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot
X X X X X X X
seals and replace if necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front
X X X X X X X
axle fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
Inspect the manual transmission fluid
X X X X X X X
(if equipped).
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
X X X X X X X
necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
8
X X X X X X X
with four wheel disc brakes.
Inspect transfer case fluid
X X X X X
(All Wheel Drive Only).
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs.1 X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) X X
whichever comes first.
Change the manual transmission fluid
(if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of
the following: Most of your driving is at
X X X
sustained speeds during hot weather, above
90°F (32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or
stop and go driving.
Change the transfer case fluid; if using your
vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
X X
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
(All Wheel Drive Only).
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Change the rear axle fluid and on models

equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change
the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for X X X
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,
off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your 8
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L E NGINE
1 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 — Engine Oil Fill

2 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5.7L E NGINE
1 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 — Engine Oil Fill

2 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick
CHECKING OIL L EVEL To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must ADDING W ASHER F LUID
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
WARNING! check the engine oil level is about ten minutes after a fully front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
 Never smoke while working in the engine compart- warmed up engine is shut off. fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
ment: gas and flammable vapors may be present, Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
with the risk of fire. improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
 Be very careful when working in the engine compart- There are four possible dipstick types:
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
ment when the engine is hot: you may get burned. Do  Crosshatched zone. washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades
not get too close to the radiator cooling fan: the elec-  Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. clean. This will help blade performance.
tric fan may start; danger of injury. Scarves, ties and
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
other loose clothing might be pulled by moving parts.
the range and MAX at the high end of the range. cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
and the MAX ends of the range. information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
CAUTION!
NOTE: The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 Gallon (4 Liters) of
 Be careful not to confuse the various types of fluids Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
while topping up: they are not compatible with each markings on the dipstick. appears in the instrument cluster.
other! Topping up with an unsuitable fluid could Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
severely damage your car. of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end WARNING!
 The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark. of the range marking.
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
 Always top up using engine oil of the same specifica- flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
CAUTION! be exercised when filling or working around the washer
tions as what is already in the engine.
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause solution.
 If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for the
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine to cool down before loosening the filler cap,
engine.
particularly for vehicles with aluminum caps (if
equipped). WARNING: risk of burns!
 Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY CAUTION!

Service Manuals are available which include detailed
service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.  It is essential when replacing the cables on the Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
Water will never have to be added, and periodic battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi- NOTE:
maintenance is not required. tive post and the negative cable is attached to the Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
NOTE: negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. and negative (-) and are identified on the battery assessed against you.
Remote battery terminals are located in the engine case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
compartment for jump starting Ú page 216. posts and free of corrosion. WARNING!
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
WARNING! vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
 Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
PRESSURE WASHING
amounts of water Ú page 216. Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure ENGINE OIL
washer is not recommended.
 Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame Engine Oil Selection
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
CAUTION! Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
Ú page 278.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and
clamps to touch each other. connections however, the pressures generated by these NOTE: 8
 Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories machines is such that complete protection against Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup and then
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after water ingress cannot be guaranteed. quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This is normal
handling. and will not harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles: for example, if the vehicle is
 The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE started then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound. Other
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, causes could be if the vehicle is unused for an extended
special tools, and equipment to perform all service period of time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
operations in an expert manner. extended idling. If the engine continues to tick or if the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on, see the
nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Shaker Hood — If Equipped NOTE:

Approved Engine Oil Shaker Hood Oil Filler Never use strong detergents, high pressure, or gasoline on
air filters.
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the For vehicles equipped with a Shaker Hood, the upper
API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark scoop will need to be removed so that oil can be properly 4. Without allowing the solution to flow back into the
oils. added to the engine. inside of the air filter, submerge the filter media into
the water and let it soak for ten minutes.
The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20, To do this, see the following procedure:
0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils. 5. Empty the bucket filled with dirty water and repeat
1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool located in steps 3 and 4.
glove compartment.
6. Refill the bucket with clean warm water and rinse the
2. Lift off the upper scoop. filter by rotating the filter.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
5W-40 engine oil. NOTE: NOTE:
Be sure to clean off all debris around or inside the Shaker The water should be clean with no signs of dirt in the
assembly. bucket.
3. Locate the oil fill cover in the base assembly and 7. Allow the filter to air dry. Reinstall the filter on the
CAUTION! expose the oil fill cap. intake system once it is dry.
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the 4. Remove oil fill cap to add oil. NOTE:
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is 5. Reinstall Shaker assembly. Do not use forced air pressure to dry the air filter as
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. damage may occur and void the warranty.
Shaker Hood Air Filter Cleaning
Shaker air filters are made of a unique, washable Shaker Hood Removal And Cleaning
Synthetic Engine Oils synthetic material. Base program air filters with paper 1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool located in
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only media cannot be washed. All filters follow the same the glove compartment.
use synthetic API approved engine oils. service interval, though Shaker systems substitute a
2. Lift off the upper scoop.
cleaning while paper air filter elements are to be replaced.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
1. Remove the air filter from the intake and set the
NOTE:
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
filter clamp aside. Be sure to clean off all debris around or inside of the
numbers should not be used.
Shaker assembly.
2. Measure the length of the filter media.
3. Fill a bucket with warm clean water to the depth
matching the filter media measurement and add a
mild household detergent or air filter cleaning
solution.
3. Using water and mild detergent, clean the following ENGINE OIL FILTER Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
locations: The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
 The water drain slot located at the front forward The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used.
edge of the Shaker assembly. every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
T/A Air Filter Maintenance — If Equipped
 The seals attached to the scoop and air box.
Clean Engine Air Filter
 Lower water drains located in the lower Shaker A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
assembly and air box as well as the hood interface replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies T/A air filters are made of a unique, washable material.
areas for the seals. Apply Mopar® Leather, considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters Follow the recommended service interval as for non-T/A
Rubber & Vinyl Protectant after cleaning the seals. should be used. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is air filters, substituting a cleaning for replacement.
unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed Cleaning your engine air filter with the recommended
4. Reinstall Shaker assembly. SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements. Mopar® Performance Air Filter Service Kit is not required
Materials Added To Engine Oil ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER if you can still see any part of the wire screen on the entire
air filter regardless of how dirty it may appear. When any
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 224. part of the wire screen is no longer visible on the air filter,
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
that is an indication it is time to clean the air filter.
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and NOTE:
its performance may be impaired by supplemental For cleaning instructions see steps 1-7 from the Shaker
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” mainte-
additives. nance interval if applicable. Hood Air Filter Cleaning section Ú page 232.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Unique for T/A, using the Mopar® Performance Air Filter
Filters WARNING! Service Kit, spray oil evenly along the crown of each filter
pleat holding the nozzle about 3 inches (76 mm) away
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can from the air filter. One spray per 2 square inches
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
(1,290 square mm) of air filter. With one complete coat of 8
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the oil, let it wick (saturate) for about 20 minutes, and if
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary required touch up any light areas on either side of the
station or governmental agency for advice on how and for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is filter.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in near the engine compartment before starting the
your area. vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling 1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by
pressing the retaining clips.
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
R-134a — If Equipped
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
start of each warm season. This service should include rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. be performed by an authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
WARNING! NOTE:
 Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- compressor oil and refrigerants.
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the R-1234yf — If Equipped
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo- Access Door
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental 2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
information. Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
 The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
equipment.
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician. NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
CAUTION! Cabin Air Filter
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
system as the chemicals can damage your air behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When Filter Access Cover
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
3. Remove the used filter. Conditions that would require replacement:

WARNING!
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the  Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the  You can be badly injured working on or around a belt body)
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this). motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you  Rib or belt wear
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If  Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a  Belt slips
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
 Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct
mechanic.
position on pulley)
 Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that belt is installed)
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are  Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive inspected for damage and proper alignment.
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Cabin Air Filter Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
5. Close the filter access cover. at an authorized dealer.
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 223.
BODY LUBRICATION
ACCESSORY D RIVE BELT INSPECTION Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, 8
WARNING! tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
 Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy
with vehicle running.
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
 When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon- application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,
controlled and can start at any time regardless of excess oil and grease should be removed.
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
(Continued)
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
components to ensure proper function. When performing blade from the wiper arm.
other underhood services, the hood latch, release CAUTION!
mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated. Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small be damaged.
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the press the release tab on the wiper blade and while
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
of salt or road film.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may 1 — Wiper Blade
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use 2 — Wiper Arm
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt 3 — Release Tab
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from 4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. Installing The Front Wipers
NOTE: 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on is in the full up position.
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor- 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position the wiper arm.
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are 3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. 1 — Wiper Blade
opening in the wiper blade.
2 — Wiper Arm
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
3 — Release Tab
arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM CAUTION!

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
 Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into  The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-  Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
system. ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device vehicle.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; and may seriously reduce engine performance and  Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires discon-
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; cause serious damage to the engine. nected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
have an authorized technician inspect the complete tioning operating conditions.
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
the event of engine malfunction, particularly NOTE:
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of The vehicle exhaust system may be equipped with an Elec-
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. tronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the exhaust system is
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe replaced with aftermarket products a Malfunction Indi-
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, cator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate.
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle. COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
 Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter WARNING!
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can  You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
Ú page 196. you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over

NOTE: do not open the hood until the radiator has had time 8
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
materials that can burn. Such materials might be result in civil penalties being assessed against you. when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
in areas where your exhaust system can contact engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
anything that can burn. and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, whether the engine is running or not.
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications,
 When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
should be obtained immediately.
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
position. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON position.
Coolant Checks Selection Of Coolant Adding Coolant

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every For further information Ú page 278. Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
NOTE: allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic  Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci- coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant, 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the may result in engine damage and may decrease corro- prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, sion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and important to use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech- conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your
vertically down the face of the condenser. nology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat- vehicle.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced Please review these recommendations for using Organic
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the
the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine  We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
or antirust products, as they may not be compatible that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
NOTE: Material Standard MS.90032.
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radi-
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
ator.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed  This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
to be added to the system please contact an authorized Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
dealer. propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recom-
mended. temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
 Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with  Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
MS.90032). The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount
needed to be added to the system please contact an
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 224. authorized dealer. of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE: Cooling System Notes

WARNING!
 It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper NOTE:
level of protection against freezing according to the  Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci- When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
operated. damage may result. of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
 Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
Disposal Of Used Coolant
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter
needed to be added to the system, please contact an Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a the radiator.
authorized dealer. regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
 Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the  Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible. ground: clean up any ground spills immediately. If  Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
ingested, seek emergency assistance immediately. the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
Cooling System Pressure Cap to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
Coolant Level
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine bottle must also be protected against freezing.
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for  If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
bottle/recovery tank (if equipped). adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the  Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
engine coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
indicated on the bottle.
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your 8
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is engine which contains aluminum components.
WARNING! no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for  Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
engine coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant. hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
 Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine  Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over- operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an need only be checked once a month. condenser clean.
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain the  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
not overfill. ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
hot or under pressure.
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
(Continued) poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM Use only brake fluid that has been recommended by the CLUTCH H YDRAULIC S YSTEM — MANUAL
manufacturer, and has been kept in a tightly closed
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or T RANSMISSION (I F EQUIPPED)
system components should be inspected periodically moisture Ú page 278.
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume
Ú page 224.
of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir.
WARNING! In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
WARNING! manufacturer's recommended brake fluid Ú page 278.
 Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly Ú page 278. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the severely damage your brake system and/or impair its
MANUAL T RANSMISSION — IF E QUIPPED
brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
Fluid Level Check
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
in an emergency. side of the transmission. The fluid level should be
 To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois- 1/4 inch (6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder in a tightly closed container. Keep the master Ú page 278.
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
the Brake System Warning Light indicates system failure. CAUTION!
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged Using a transmission fluid other than the
performing underhood services. braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could manufacturer's recommended fluid may cause
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing result in a collision. deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the damage to the transmission Ú page 278.
 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage Change Transmission Fluid
cause leaking in the system. painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces. If contaminated with water, change the fluid immediately.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements See an authorized dealer for service.
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes,  Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 224.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
checkup may be needed. This could result in a collision.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — CAUTION! ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) —

I F EQUIPPED If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
I F E QUIPPED
Special Additives dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may The All-Wheel Drive system consists of a transfer case and
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to front differential. The exterior surface of these components
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any adjust the fluid level accurately. should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed
special additives in the transmission. Automatic leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Fluid And Filter Changes The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in the
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer case fluid
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The fluid level should
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life be even with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug to add
may adversely affect seals.
of the vehicle. fluid as required.
CAUTION! Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes near the half shaft attachment. To inspect the differential
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level should be
chemicals can damage your transmission components. disassembled for any reason. even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Selection Of Lubricant Fluid Changes
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 223.
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
Fluid Level Check only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid REAR AXLE
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require Ú page 278. It is important to maintain the transmission
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. Fluid Level Check 8
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the NOTE: Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level ground
transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can and has been stationary for 15 minutes will improve the
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
check your transmission fluid level using special service accuracy of the fluid level reading.
only the approved lubricant should be used.
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle.
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
CAUTION! The fluid level should be 1-2.5 mm below the fill plug. Add
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level Ú page 278.
Using a transmission fluid other than the
transmission damage. manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause Change Axle Fluid
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 223.
converter shudder Ú page 278.
FUSES The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive Underhood Fuses
current.
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
General Information When a device does not work, you must check the fuse engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt. relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed
WARNING! Also, please be aware that using power outlets for on the inside of the power distribution center cover.
 When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro- extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as vehicle battery discharge. CAUTION!
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another When installing the power distribution center cover, it is
fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a fuse with a important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse into the power distribution center and possibly result in
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit an electrical system failure.
that must be corrected. Never replace a blown fuse
with metal wires or any other material. Do not place
a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa.
Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
 Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged. Blade Fuses
 If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an 1 — Fuse Element

authorized dealer. 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
 If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
(blown fuse)
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
8
Front Power Distribution Center Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
40 Amp Green Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L & Non – Police)
F02 –
50 Amp Red Radiator Fan (6.2L & Police)
F03 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 *
F04 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F05 40 Amp Green – Anti-Lock Brake
F06 30 Amp Pink – Anti-Lock Brake
F07 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
F08 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
F09 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module *
F10 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion MOD (300) * / Under Hood Lamp – Police
F11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID Headlamp *
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID Headlamp *
F18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan #2
F19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
30 Amp Pink Headlamp Washers *
F21 –
20 Amp Blue – Police Police Bat Feed #2

* If Equipped
40 Amp Green LTR Cooling Pump (6.2L Eng)
F22 –
20 Amp Blue – Police Police Bat Feed # 3
F23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1
F24 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
F28 – – Spare
F29 – 15 Amp Blue Auto Trans (Challenger / Police)
F30 – – Spare
F31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare
F34 – 25 Amp Clear ASD Feed #1
F35 – 20 Amp Yellow ASD Feed #2
F36 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module / Steering Column Lock Module *
F37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller
8
F38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F39 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch / EPS */ Vacuum Pump *
F48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module / Front Axle Disconnect *
F49 – – Spare
F50 – – Spare
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump *
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise Control *
F53 – – Spare
Rear Fuses
CAUTION!
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center When installing the power distribution center cover, it is
contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
descriptions are printed on the inside of the power and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
distribution center cover. into the power distribution center and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
Rear Power Distribution Center Location

* If Equipped
F02 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1
F03 – – Spare
F04 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2
30 Amp Pink Sunroof *
F05 –
20 Amp Blue – Police Dome Lamp – Police
F06 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1
F07 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2
F08 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting
F09 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
F10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control Module
F11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control Module
Cigar Lighter / IP APO / RR USB
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow
(Selectable Fuse) *

* If Equipped
F15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower
F16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police
F17 20 Amp Blue – Right Spot Lamp – Police
F18 30 Amp Pink – VISM Mod (Police)
F19 – – Spare
F20 – – Spare
30 Amp Pink Fuel Pump (Non 6.2L ADR)
F21 –
40 Amp Green Fuel Pump #2 (6.2L XVC)
F22 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Gateway Module
F23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door SW * / Diagnostic Port
F24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack
F25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor System
F26 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Mod (Charger / 300)
F27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier *
8
F31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats *
F32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module / Cluster
IGN SW / Wireless Mod / Steer Clmn Lock
F33 – 15 Amp Blue
Mod / Remote Start *
F34 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module / Clock (300)
F35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F36 – 15 Amp Blue Active Exhaust Valve *
F37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio

* If Equipped
F38 – 20 Amp Yellow Media Hub / Console APO
F40 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump #1 (6.2L ADR)
30 Amp Pink Fuel Pump #2 (6.2L ADR)
F41 –
40 Amp Green Fuel Pump #1 (6.2L XVC)
F42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost
Rear Heated Seats * / Heated Steering
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow
Wheel *
Park Assist */ Blind Spot */ Rear View
F44 – 10 Amp Red
Camera *
Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Lane Departure
F45 – 15 Amp Blue
*
F46 – – Spare
Adaptive Front Lighting */ Day Time
F47 – 10 Amp Red
Running Lamps *
F48 – 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension – (6.4L*/ 6.2L)
F49 – – Spare
F50 – – Spare
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated */ Vented Seats *
Heated Cup Holders */ Rear Heated Seat
F52 – 10 Amp Red
Switches *
HVAC Module / In Vehicle Temperature
F53 – 10 Amp Red
Sensor
F54 – – Spare
F55 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
F59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62 – – Spare
F63 – – Spare
F64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/300)
F66 – – Spare
Rain & Light Sensor */ Sunroof */ Inside
F67 – 10 Amp Red
RearView Mirror / Police Run Acc
F68 – 10 Amp Red Rear USB Timer / Rear Sunshade *
F69 – – Spare 8
F70 – – Spare
BULB R EPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID) D3S (Serviced at an authorized dealer) *
Halogen Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Park/Turn Lamp LED
Front Fog Lamp H11LL
Front Side Marker LED
Tail Lamp LED
Stop/Turn Lamp LED
Rear Side Marker LED
Backup Lamp LED
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
License LED
* The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
8
Replacing Exterior Bulbs 2. Remove the large dust cap from the headlamp
housing by turning it counterclockwise. CAUTION!
LOW BEAM HEADLAMP, HIGH BEAM 3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise, and remove. Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
HEADLAMP — MODELS WITH HALOGEN contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
HEADLAMPS — IF EQUIPPED comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood. 6. Reinstall the access cap making sure it is seated into
the housing and turn cap clockwise to engage locking
lugs. Visually, you should be unable to see the blue
O-ring gasket. The access cap should be uniformly
seated and you should not be able to pull the access
cap off without turning it counterclockwise.
CAUTION!
Headlamp Location
If the access cap is not installed correctly after bulb
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
replacement, the lamp becomes susceptible to dust,
install the replacement bulb.
condensation, and water intrusion. This may ultimately
5. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the lead to an inoperative lamp. If the access cap cannot
Headlamp Assembly Dust Cap Location headlamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise. be installed correctly, please return to an authorized
dealer for proper repair or access cap replacement if
NOTE: necessary.
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary
prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the
driver side of the vehicle.
LOW BEAM HEADLAMP, HIGH BEAM HEAD- FRONT PARK/SIGNATURE LAMP CENTER TAIL/BACKUP LAMP
LAMP — MODELS WITH HIGH INTENSITY The Front Park/Signature function is part of the headlamp The Center Tail/Backup Lamp use LED lamps that are not
DISCHARGE (HID) HEADLAMPS — IF EQUIPPED assembly and use LED lamps that are not serviceable serviceable separately. The Center Tail/Backup Lamp
separately. The headlamps must be replaced as an must be replaced as an assembly; see an authorized
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
assembly, see an authorized dealer. dealer.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
FRONT TURN/DRL LAMP CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an The Front Turn/DRL function is part of the headlamp The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not
authorized dealer for service. assembly and use LED lamps that are not serviceable serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be
separately. The headlamps must be replaced as an replaced as an assembly; see an authorized dealer.
WARNING! assembly, see an authorized dealer.
LICENSE LAMP
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of FRONT/REAR SIDE MARKER LAMP
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be
electrocution if not serviced properly. See an authorized separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an replaced as an assembly; see an authorized dealer.
dealer for service. assembly, see an authorized dealer.
TAIL/TURN AND STOP LAMP

TIRES
NOTE: The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps use LED lamps that are not TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when the serviceable separately. The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps
headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. must be replaced as an assembly, see an authorized Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
This diminishes and becomes more white after approxi- information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
mately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
dealer.
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
8
Loading.
Tire Markings NOTE:  Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
sidewall preceding the size designation.
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
 High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
 European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the sidewall.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
 LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
Tire Markings tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
8
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
EXAMPLE:
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd
week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
Tire Placard
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about the:
NOTE: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
door.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tires.
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle. Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
Tire And Loading Information Placard
pressures specified on the Tire And Loading Information
Placard Ú page 97.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) trailer towing Ú page 97.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard. The
Tire And Loading Information Placard combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit— (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit
(1) Locate the statement “The combined available amount of cargo and luggage For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
weight of occupants and cargo should load capacity. For example, if “XXX” available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
vehicle's placard. be five 150 lb passengers in your NOTE:

vehicle, the amount of available cargo  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
(2) Determine the combined weight of trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
the driver and passengers that will be table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
riding in your vehicle. with varying seating configurations and number and
(5) Determine the combined weight of size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
luggage and cargo being loaded on the only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
driver and passengers from XXX kg or carry capacity of your vehicle.
vehicle. That weight may not safely
XXX lbs.  For the following example, the combined weight of
exceed the available cargo and luggage occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
load capacity calculated in Step 4. (392 kg).
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the 8
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

WARNING! WARNING!
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can  Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended vehicle control.
Tire Inflation Pressures
load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
 Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
At least once a month:
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION  Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
 Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
Tire Pressure or left.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judg-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
 Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
mended cold tire inflation pressure.  Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
are affected by improper tire pressure:
 Safety CAUTION!
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
 Fuel Economy
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
 Tread Wear or over responsiveness in the steering. reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
NOTE: and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
Safety damage the valve stem.
 Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
WARNING! erratic and unpredictable steering response.
 Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can vehicle to drift left or right. “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is 8
cause collisions. defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
Fuel Economy
driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of 3 hours. The cold
overheating and tire failure. resulting in higher fuel consumption. tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Tread Wear inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
(Continued) for earlier tire replacement.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with WARNING! designed to be reused.
temperature changes.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
the Winter. pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire Radial Ply Tires Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run
outside temperature condition.
WARNING!
Flat tire is changed after being driven under a Run Flat
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please replace the TPMS
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. sensor as it is not designed to be reused.
build up or your tire pressure will be too low. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other NOTE:
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation types of tires. TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
a flat tire condition.
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
Tire Repair capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it mode.
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle meets the following criteria: See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section for more
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.  The tire has not been driven on when flat. information.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment  The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, (sidewall damage is not repairable).
Tire Spinning
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.  The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6 mm). When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
additional information.
For further information Ú page 220.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread NOTE:
WARNING! grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. replaced.
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph Life Of Tire with oil, grease, and gasoline.
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors Replacement Tires
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. including, but not limited to:
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
 Driving style. characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
 Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
Tread Wear Indicators can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equivalent
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce to the originals in size, quality and performance when
help you in determining when your tires should be tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement is needed Ú page 263. Refer to the Tire And
replaced. replacement. Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle Certification
 Distance driven. Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced equipment tire sidewall.
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sched- See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
uled maintenance is highly recommended. Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire
WARNING! Ú page 253.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear 8
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
serious injury or death. original wheels.
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or TIRE TYPES Snow Tires
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use All Season Tires — If Equipped during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
between different all season tires. All season tires can be size and type to the original equipment tires.
WARNING! identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
 Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; so may adversely affect the safety and handling
rating other than that specified for your vehicle. failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and of your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
Summer Or Three Season Tires — was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. If Equipped be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/
h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
steering and suspension components. You could conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be pressures.
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
load ratings approved for your vehicle. driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
 Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
other than what was originally equipped on your roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer. studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could before using these tire types.
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
control and have a collision. mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
 Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. NOTE:
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING! spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
CAUTION! could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may possibility of loss of vehicle control.
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
CAUTION! tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle at the first opportunity. the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed. conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
Damage to the vehicle may result. wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated
on the vehicle at any given time. WARNING!
for temporary emergency use Ú page 102. Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
WARNING!
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
And Wheel — If Equipped emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
pattern.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only. front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to 8
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
And Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” Collapsible spare tire description equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
preceding the size designation. Example: 165/80-17 101P. opportunity.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped WHEEL A ND W HEEL TRIM CARE Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or
their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive,
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster CAUTION!
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not
handling. Since it is not the same as your original damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
hot to the touch.
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium recommended.
WARNING! chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh NOTE:
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the protective coating that helps keep them from corroding extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep and tarnishing. cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your the water droplets from the brake components. This
Tire And Loading Information Placard located on the CAUTION! activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car Clear Coat Wheels
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited CAUTION!
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
or equivalent is recommended.
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
damage to the wheels. basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
SNOW TRACTION D EVICES

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage.
 Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
 No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
 Please follow the table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
Snow Traction Device

RWD
Axle Tire/Wheel Size (Maximum Projection Beyond Tire
Trim Level
Profile Or Equivalent)
235/55R18
SXT
245/45R20
Peerless Chain Super Z6 Low Profile or
GT Rear 245/45ZR20
Equivalent
245/45ZR20
R/T
275/40ZR20
Snow Traction Device

AWD
Axle Tire/Wheel Size (Maximum Projection Beyond Tire
Trim Level
Profile Or Equivalent) 8
235/55R19
SXT
245/45R20
Rear S Class
245/45R20
GT
245/45ZR20
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION! TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
following precautions:
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at The following tire grading categories
 Because of restricted traction device clearance unequal rates.
between tires and other suspension components, it were established by the National
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
is important that only traction devices in good condi-
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type The specific grade rating assigned by the
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
tire's manufacturer in each category is
damaged parts of the device before further use.
smooth, quiet ride. shown on the sidewall of the tires on
 Install device as tightly as possible and then For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 223. The your vehicle.
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
Autosock traction devices do not require prior to rotation being performed. All passenger vehicle tires must conform
retightening.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross” to Federal safety requirements in
 Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does addition to these grades.
 Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large not apply to some directional tires that must not be
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. reversed. TREADWEAR
 Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. The Treadwear grade is a comparative
 Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc- rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
when tested under controlled conditions
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is on a specified government test course.
less than 30 mph (48 km/h). For example, a tire graded 150 would
 Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
The relative performance of tires TEMPERATURE G RADES WARNING!

depends upon the actual conditions of The Temperature grades are A (the The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
their use, however, and may depart highest), B, and C, representing the tire's tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
significantly from the norm due to resistance to the generation of heat and
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
variations in driving habits, service its ability to dissipate heat, when tested buildup and possible tire failure.
practices, and differences in road under controlled conditions on a
characteristics and climate. specified indoor laboratory test wheel. VEHICLE STORAGE
TRACTION G RADES Sustained high temperature can cause If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 3
weeks, you may want to take these steps to protect your
The Traction grades, from highest to the material of the tire to degenerate battery.
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades and reduce tire life, and excessive  Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet temperature can lead to sudden tire  Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
pavement, as measured under failure. The grade C corresponds to a (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
controlled conditions on specified level of performance, which all fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
government test surfaces of asphalt and passenger vehicle tires must meet adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety again.
traction performance. Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
8
represent higher levels of performance
WARNING! on the laboratory test wheel, than the
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on minimum required by law.
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
BODYWORK What Causes Corrosion? PRESERVING T HE BODYWORK

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC and protective coatings from your vehicle. Washing
 Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
AGENTS The most common causes are:
in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car
 Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
 Stone and gravel impact.  If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are  Insects, tree sap and tar. lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons  Salt in the air near seacoast localities. and Tar Remover to remove.
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside  Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.  Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is BODY AND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme paint.
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
Cleaning Headlights  Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
and underbody protection. Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion breakage than glass headlights. CAUTION!
resistance built into your vehicle. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore  Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and scratch metal and painted surfaces.
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
 Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
followed by rinsing.
and decals.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Special Care INTERIORS WARNING!

 If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
month. and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
 It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and carpeting. parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
open. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. If
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, WARNING! your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
touch them up immediately. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, areas they may cause respiratory harm. for inspection.
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
 If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Seat Belt Maintenance PLASTIC A ND C OATED PARTS
packaged and sealed. Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
or stone shields behind each wheel.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar® Total Clean, a mild
 Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as CAUTION!
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.  Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
match the color of your vehicle. suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the belts
if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
properly. 8
 Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular GLASS SURFACES
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
Lenses act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth. NOTE: When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
LEATHER S URFACES foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than directly on the mirror.
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
leather upholstery. and the manufacturer recommends Mopar® total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or
ketone-based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may result.
273
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) This may be evident by increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop,
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
The VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel. and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
windshield. example, repeated brake applications with the engine off),
the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake
the vehicle will be much greater than that required with
the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Windshield VIN Location
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
NOTE: nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/Bolt Lug Nut/Bolt is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it
Torque Size Socket Size halfway).
BRAKE SYSTEM 130 ft-lb NOTE:
9
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
(176 N·m) If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service
capability, the remaining system will still function. There station.
will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness.
274 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be

sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly tightened.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS 5.7L E NGINE (WITH AUTOMATIC
While operating on gasoline with the required octane TRANSMISSION)
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
15% in this engine.
making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than This engine is designed to meet all emission
recommended octane number can cause engine failure regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. economy and performance when using high
quality unleaded gasoline having a posted
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
octane number range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane plus gasoline is
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
recommended for optimum performance and fuel
considering service for the vehicle.
economy.
Torque Patterns 3.6L E NGINE 5.7L E NGINE (WITH MANUAL
WARNING!
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than TRANSMISSION)
15% in this engine.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do This engine is designed to meet all emission Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has regulations and provide excellent fuel economy 15% in this engine.
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result and performance when using high-quality This engine is designed to meet all emission
in personal injury. unleaded regular gasoline having an octane regulations, provide optimal fuel economy and
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use performance when using high-quality unleaded
of higher octane premium gasoline will not provide any premium gasoline having a posted octane
benefit over regular gasoline in these engines. number of 91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline is required
for this engine.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 275
REFORMULATED G ASOLINE Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”. ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are diaphragm materials. Warranty.
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality. GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS DO N OT U SE E-85 IN N ON-FLEX F UEL
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with VEHICLES
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide oxygenates such as ethanol.
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
system components. containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
CAUTION! higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or Warranty.
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane of these blends may result in starting and drivability the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and problems, damage critical fuel system components,
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that  Operate in a lean mode.
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
have these additives will help improve fuel economy, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to  OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should  Poor engine performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than  Poor cold start and cold drivability.
contains a higher level of detergents to further 15% ethanol (E-15).  Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
9
CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS CAUTION!

MODIFICATIONS  The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
CAUTION!
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s these products contain high concentrations of meth-
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system performance: anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
 The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may tives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited and may void or not be covered under the New
mance and damage the emissions control system.
Warranty. Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
NOTE:
MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
GASOLINE malfunctioning and may require immediate service. can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline (Continued)
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life
and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 18.5 gal 70 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 qt 5.6 L
5.7L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine 11.1 qt 10.5 L
5.7L Engine 14.7 qt 13.9 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
9
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Engine Coolant
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine SAE 5W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
Ú page 232.
Mopar® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to the manufacturer Material Standard
MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
Ú page 232.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine With Automatic Transmission 89 Octane recommended – 87 Octane acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine With Manual Transmission 91 Octane or higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol.
CAUTION!
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or
any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3, SAE J1703.
Front Axle – AWD (If Equipped) We recommend using Mopar® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle – 3.6L/5.7L Engine With
We recommend using Mopar® OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Automatic Transmission
Rear Axle – 5.7L Engine With Manual Transmission We recommend using Mopar® LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5). 9
Transfer Case – AWD (If Equipped) We recommend using Mopar® Transfer Case Lubricant for Borg Warner 44–40.
280
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT with our products and services.
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. (Canada)
All work to be performed may not be covered by the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and Who is Covered
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
service history. This can often provide a clue to the current service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
problem. facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
PREPARE A L IST correctly and in a timely manner. start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the This is why you should always talk to an authorized your Warranty Information book. 1
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you are 1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services
service advisor know. the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc., Thousand
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the Oaks, CA 91360.
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS concern, you may contact the FCA US LLC's Customer
What to Do
If you list a number of items and you must have your Assistance center.
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center
gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing as
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At should include the following information:
a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA:
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle  Owner's name and address 1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Provide your
(additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is
 Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office) name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required for
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
 Authorized dealer name covered services, license plate number, and your location,
an appointment.
 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) including the telephone number from which you are
 Vehicle delivery date and mileage calling. Briefly describe the nature of the problem and
answer a few simple questions.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 281
You will be given the name of the service provider and an Flat Tire Service FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
estimated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an unsafe If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch a
situation, please let us know. With your consent, we will service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare tire P.O. Box 21–8004
contact local police or safety authorities. (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s Manual. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance This is not a permanent flat tire repair. Phone: (800) 423-6343
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you may nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We will P.O. Box 1621
submit your original receipts from the licensed towing or dispatch a service provider to deliver a small amount of
service facility, for services rendered within30 days of the Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a nearby station.
occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN, odometer This service is limited to two occurrences in a 12-month Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
mileage at the time of service, and current mailing period.
address. We will process the claim based on vehicle and MEXICO
service eligibility. If eligible, we will reimburse you for the Battery Jump Assistance
reasonable amount actually paid, based on the usual and No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
customary charges for that service in the area where they Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about Sante Fe C.P. 05109
were provided. FCA US LLC’s determination relating to being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to Mexico, D.F.
reimbursement is final. Correspondence should be mailed provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
to: In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Lockout Service
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen locks
P.O. Box 9145 are keeping you from getting on your way, help is just a PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
Medford, MA 02155 phone call away. This service is limited to providing access
to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not cover the cost of FCA Caribbean LLC
Attention Claims Department replacement keys. P.O. Box 191857
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or Towing Service San Juan 00919-1857
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance program is subject to restrictions Our towing service gives you peace of mind and Phone: (800) 423-6343
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of
and conditions of use, which are determined solely by
a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
Fax: (787) 782-3345 10
FCA US LLC.
dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
282 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you Use this QR code to access your digital
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you experience.
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
(TDD/TTY) Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
MOPAR® PARTS
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, We appreciate that you have made a major investment Mopar® original equipment parts &
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has accessories and factory filled fluids are
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and available from an authorized dealer.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access training to ensure that you are absolutely delighted with They are recommended for your
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the the ownership experience. vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain its
United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by original condition.
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
WARNING!
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES A ND
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator. State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or WASHINGTON, D.C.
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
SERVICE CONTRACT contained in vehicles and certain products of If you believe that your vehicle has a
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to defect that could cause a crash or cause
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected defects, or other reproductive harm. injury or death, you should immediately
repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty inform the National Highway Traffic
expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
WARRANTY INFORMATION addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. information.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National Customer of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call and market.
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 283
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it I N C ANADA Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
may open an investigation, and if it finds If you believe that your vehicle has a
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
that a safety defect exists in a group of safety defect, you should contact the easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicles, it may order a recall and Customer Service Department
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA immediately. Canadian customers who troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
cannot become involved in individual wish to report a safety defect to the diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
problems between you, an authorized equipment.
Canadian government should contact To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
dealer or FCA US LLC. Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Procedure manuals, visit:
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Investigations and Recalls at www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-800-333-0510 or go to Owner's Manuals
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/ These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
1-800-424-9153); or go to http:// assistance of service and engineering specialists to
PCDB-BDPP. acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
www.safercar.gov; or write to: To access your Owner's Information online, visit
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, To order the following manuals, you may use either the (Canada).
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other website or the phone numbers listed below. Or
information about motor vehicle safety Service Manuals Call Tech Authority toll free at:
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a  1-800-890-4038 (US)
from http://www.safercar.gov. complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/ Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
or components and is written in straightforward language Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
10
284 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,

Science and Economic Development applicables aux
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est *If you have purchased this vehicle used or have changed
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: your address, please provide the following information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et and mail to:
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage FCA US LLC
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est P.O. Box 21–8008
subject to the following two conditions: susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes Make sure to include the following:
2. This device must accept any interference received, dos condiciones:
including interference that may cause undesired  Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
operation.  Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
interferencia perjudicial y
located on top left of the instrument panel)
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier  Exact Odometer Reading
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su  First and Last Name
operación no deseada.
 Phone Number
NOTE:  Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the  Email Address
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s *Applies to US residents only.
authority to operate the equipment.
285
INDEX
A Air Pressure Automatic High Beams .................................................. 40
About Your Brakes ................................................ 74, 273 Tires..........................................................................261 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 48
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .................................84, 85 Alarm Automatic Transmission ................................................ 79
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 238 Arm The System.................................................. 19, 20 Adding Fluid....................................................241, 279
Adding Washing Fluid .................................................. 230 Panic........................................................................... 13 Fluid And Filter Change........................................... 241
Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 275 Rearm The System ....................................................20 Fluid Change ........................................................... 241
Advance Phone Connectivity ....................................... 142 Security Alarm..................................................... 19, 66 Fluid Level Check .................................................... 241
Air Bag........................................................................... 180 Alarm System Fluid Type .......................................................241, 279
Advance Front Air Bag ............................................ 180 Security Alarm............................................................ 19 Special Additives..................................................... 241
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 181 All Wheel Drive Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ................. 81
Air Bag Warning Light ............................................. 179 Towing ......................................................................222 AutoPark ......................................................................... 72
Enhanced Accident Response ...................... 184, 222 All Wheel Drive (AWD)...................................................241 Autostick
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 222 Alterations/Modifications Operation................................................................... 82
Front Air Bag ........................................................... 180 Vehicle.......................................................................... 8 AWD
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 183 Alternate Tire Service Kit — If Equipped b ..............211 Towing...................................................................... 222
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 181 Android Auto........................................................ 144, 145 Axle Fluid....................................................................... 279
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 184 Android auto™ b .......................................................144 Axle Lubrication ............................................................ 279
Maintenance ........................................................... 184 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 238, 277
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 179 Disposal ...................................................................239 B
Side Air Bags ........................................................... 181 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................159 Back Up Camera............................................................. 96
Transporting Pets.................................................... 196 Anti-Lock Warning Light.................................................. 66 Battery.................................................................... 64, 231
Air Bag Light ................................................. 63, 179, 196 Apple CarPlay ...................................................... 144, 147 Charging System Light.............................................. 64
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........... 233 Apple carplay® ¹...........................................................146 Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 13
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................... 234 Arming System Location ................................................................... 231
Air Conditioner Refrigerant.......................................... 234 Security Alarm............................................................ 19 Belts, Seat..................................................................... 196
Air Conditioner System ................................................ 234 Assist, Hill Start.............................................................162 Blind Spot Monitoring .................................................. 164
Air Conditioning ...............................................................45 Audio Settings...............................................................131 Bluetooth
Air Conditioning Filter ........................................... 49, 234 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................106 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Air Conditioning System..................................................45 Auto Down Power Windows............................................52 Or Audio Device After Pairing ............................ 139 11
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.....................................48 Automatic Door Locks ....................................................24 Body Mechanism Lubrication ...................................... 235
Air Filter......................................................................... 233 Automatic Headlights ..................................................... 41 B-Pillar Location ........................................................... 258
286
Brake Assist System .................................................... 160 Child Restraint ..............................................................185 Cupholders

Brake Control System .................................................. 160 Child Restraints Illuminated................................................................. 50
Brake Fluid .......................................................... 240, 279 Booster Seats ..........................................................187 Customer Assistance ................................................... 280
Brake System ...................................................... 240, 273 Child Seat Installation.............................................194 Customer Programmable Features............................. 107
Fluid Check.....................................................240, 279 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .................192 Cybersecurity ................................................................ 106
Master Cylinder....................................................... 240 Infant And Child Restraints.....................................186
Parking .......................................................................74 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children...............188 D
Warning Light ................................................... 64, 273 Older Children And Child Restraints.......................187 Daytime Running Lights................................................. 40
Brake/Transmission Interlock........................................79 Seating Positions.....................................................188 Dealer Service .............................................................. 231
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ....................74 Clean Air Gasoline ........................................................275 Defroster, Windshield .................................................. 197
Brightness, Interior Lights ..............................................43 Cleaning De-Icer, Remote Start .................................................... 19
Bulb Replacement ....................................................... 250 Wheels .....................................................................266 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers............................................ 44
Bulbs, Light.......................................................... 198, 250 Climate Control ............................................................... 45 Deleting A Phone .......................................................... 139
Cold Weather Operation................................................. 74 Deluxe Vehicle Security System .................................... 20
C Compact Spare Tire ......................................................265 Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................................... 69
Camera, Rear ..................................................................96 Contract, Service ..........................................................282 Dimmer Control .............................................................. 43
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 277 Controls .........................................................................125 Dipsticks
Caps, Filler Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................239 Oil (Engine) .............................................................. 230
Fuel .............................................................................96 Cooling System .............................................................237 Disabled Vehicle Towing .............................................. 221
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 228 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................238 Disc Drive...................................................................... 133
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 239 Coolant Level ................................................. 238, 239 Disconnecting............................................................... 139
Car Washes .................................................................. 270 Cooling Capacity ......................................................277 Disposal
Carbon Monoxide Warning .......................................... 198 Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................................239 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).................................... 239
Cargo Drain, Flush, And Refill............................................238 Disturb........................................................................... 141
Vehicle Loading..........................................................97 Inspection ................................................................239 Door Ajar ......................................................................... 64
Cargo Net.........................................................................55 Points To Remember...............................................239 Door Ajar Light ................................................................ 64
CD.................................................................................. 133 Pressure Cap ...........................................................239 Door Locks
Cellular Phone .............................................................. 158 Radiator Cap............................................................239 Automatic .................................................................. 24
Certification Label...........................................................98 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........ 238, 277, 278 Remote Keyless Entry............................................... 12
Chains, Tire................................................................... 267 Corrosion Protection.....................................................270 Doors............................................................................... 21
Chart, Tire Sizing .......................................................... 255 Cruise Control ................................................................. 84 Drag & Drop .................................................................. 123
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light).........70 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...................................... 84 Drive Modes.................................................................. 154
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............................... 196 Cruise Light .....................................................................69 Driver Memory Presets ................................................ 131
Checks, Safety.............................................................. 196 Driver Memory Settings ................................................. 27
287
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ....................................................28 Oil Filler Cap.............................................................228 Fluid, Brake................................................................... 279
Driving Oil Filter....................................................................233 Fog Lights........................................................................ 42
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Oil Selection................................................... 231, 277 Fold-Flat Seats......................................................... 28, 30
Standing Water.................................................. 105 Oil Synthetic.............................................................232 Forward Collision Warning ........................................... 167
Starting....................................................................... 71 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ............................................... 220
E Engine Oil Life Reset b ............................................... 59 Fuel................................................................................ 274
Electric Brake Control System..................................... 160 Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............. 184, 222 Additives .................................................................. 275
Anti-Lock Brake System ......................................... 159 Ethanol ..........................................................................275 Clean Air .................................................................. 275
Electronic Roll Mitigation .............................. 160, 163 Exhaust Gas Cautions ..................................................198 Ethanol..................................................................... 275
Electrical Power Outlets..................................................50 Exhaust System .................................................. 198, 237 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................................. 96
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ............ 242 Exterior Lighting .............................................................. 39 Gasoline................................................................... 274
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................ 161 Exterior Lights ........................................................39, 198 Materials Added...................................................... 275
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light......................65 Methanol ................................................................. 275
Emergency Trunk Release..............................................55 F Octane Rating.................................................274, 278
Emergency, In Case Of Filler Location Fuel ......................................................... 96 Requirements.......................................................... 274
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................................. 220 Filters Specifications.......................................................... 278
Jacking..................................................................... 202 Air Cleaner ...............................................................233 Tank Capacity.......................................................... 277
Jump Starting................................................. 216, 217 Air Conditioning ................................................49, 234 Fueling ............................................................................ 96
Towing ..................................................................... 221 Engine Oil.................................................................233 Fuses............................................................................. 242
Emission Control System Maintenance.........................70 Engine Oil Disposal..................................................233
Engine .................................................................. 228, 229 Flashers.........................................................................199 G
Air Cleaner............................................................... 233 Hazard Warning.......................................................199 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).................................. 36
Break-In Recommendations .....................................74 Turn Signals ...............................................42, 69, 198 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............................................... 96
Checking Oil Level .................................................. 230 Flash-To-Pass.................................................................. 41 Gasoline, Clean Air ....................................................... 275
Compartment................................................. 228, 229 Flooded Engine Starting ................................................. 74 Gasoline, Reformulated ............................................... 275
Compartment Identification................................... 228 Fluid Capacities ............................................................277 Gear Ranges ................................................................... 79
Coolant (Antifreeze) ................................................ 238 Fluid Leaks ....................................................................198 Glass Cleaning.............................................................. 272
Cooling..................................................................... 237 Fluid Level Checks Gross Axle Weight Rating........................................ 98, 99
Exhaust Gas Caution .............................................. 198 Brake........................................................................240 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .................................. 98, 99
Fails To Start ..............................................................74 Cooling System ........................................................238 GVWR .............................................................................. 98
Flooded, Starting .......................................................74 Engine Oil.................................................................230
Fuel Requirements ................................................. 274 Transfer Case ..........................................................241 11
Jump Starting................................................. 216, 217
Oil...........................................................231, 277, 278
288
H Instrument Cluster Keyless Enter 'n Go™ ..................................................... 22

Hazard Descriptions........................................................ 56, 69 Enter The Trunk......................................................... 13
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Display................................................................. 57, 60 Keys................................................................................. 12
Shallow Standing Water.................................... 105 Instrument Cluster b .................................................. 57 Replacement ............................................................. 15
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................................ 199 Instrument Cluster Display
Head Restraints ..............................................................34 Audio .......................................................................... 62 L
Head Rests ......................................................................34 Driver Assist ............................................................... 61 Lane Change And Turn Signals ..................................... 42
Headlights Fuel Economy ............................................................ 61 Lane Change Assist........................................................ 42
Automatic ...................................................................41 Speedometer .............................................................60 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...................................................... 174
Cleaning................................................................... 270 Vehicle Info ................................................................ 60 Latches ......................................................................... 198
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch.......................40 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .................................272 Hood........................................................................... 54
Lights On Reminder ...................................................41 Interior Appearance Care .............................................271 Lead Free Gasoline ...................................................... 274
On With Wipers ..........................................................41 Interior Lights.................................................................. 42 Leaks, Fluid................................................................... 198
Passing .......................................................................41 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ............................... 44 Life Of Tires................................................................... 263
Switch .........................................................................39 iPod/USB/MP3 Control .................................................. 50 Light Bulbs ...........................................................198, 250
Time Delay..................................................................41 Bluetooth Streaming Audio....................................... 50 Lights............................................................................. 198
Washers................................................................... 230 Air Bag......................................................63, 179, 196
Heated Mirrors ................................................................36 J Automatic Headlights ............................................... 41
Heated Seats...................................................................31 Jack Location ................................................................202 Brake Assist Warning.............................................. 162
Heated Steering Wheel...................................................25 Jack Operation ..............................................................203 Brake Warning.................................................. 64, 273
Heater ..............................................................................45 Jacking And Tire Changing b ....................................202 Bulb Replacement .................................................. 250
Hill Start Assist ............................................................. 162 Jacking Instructions......................................................203 Courtesy/Reading ..................................................... 42
Hitches Jump Starting...................................................... 216, 217 Cruise......................................................................... 69
Trailer Towing.......................................................... 100 Daytime Running....................................................... 40
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..................................36 Dimmer Switch, Headlight........................................ 43
K
Hood Release ..................................................................54 Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator ............ 65
Key Fob
Arm The System......................................................... 19 Exterior.............................................................. 39, 198
I Panic Alarm................................................................ 13 Fog ............................................................................. 42
Ignition .............................................................................15 Programming Additional Key Fobs ........................... 15 Headlight Switch ....................................................... 39
Switch .........................................................................15 Unlatch The Trunk ..................................................... 13 Headlights.................................................................. 39
Illuminated Entry .............................................................43 Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ......... 13 Headlights On With Wipers....................................... 41
Information Center, Vehicle............................................58 Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ............ 15 High Beam ................................................................. 40
Inside Rearview Mirror.......................................... 35, 199 High Beam/Low Beam Select .................................. 40
Illuminated Entry....................................................... 43
289
Interior ........................................................................42 Manual Capacity ................................................................... 277

License .................................................................... 253 Park Release............................................................218 Checking.................................................................. 230
Lights On Reminder ...................................................41 Service .....................................................................283 Dipstick .................................................................... 230
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)......................67 Manual Transmission .................................. 76, 240, 241 Disposal ................................................................... 233
Map.............................................................................42 Fluid Level Check .......................................... 240, 241 Filter ......................................................................... 233
Park .....................................................................41, 68 Map/Reading Lights ....................................................... 42 Filter Disposal.......................................................... 233
Passing .......................................................................41 Media Mode ..................................................................133 Identification Logo .................................................. 232
Reading ......................................................................42 Memory Seat................................................................... 27 Materials Added To ................................................. 233
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................................64 Memory Settings.............................................................27 Pressure Warning Light ............................................ 65
Security Alarm............................................................66 Methanol .......................................................................275 Recommendation...........................................231, 277
Service..................................................................... 250 Mirrors .............................................................................35 Synthetic.................................................................. 232
Traction Control ...................................................... 162 Electric Powered........................................................ 36 Viscosity................................................................... 277
Turn Signals .............................................. 42, 69, 198 Heated........................................................................ 36 Onboard Diagnostic System .......................................... 69
Vanity Mirror...............................................................35 Outside....................................................................... 35 Operating Precautions ................................................... 69
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions.........65, 69 Rearview ...........................................................35, 199 Operator Manual
Load Shed Battery Saver On ..........................................62 Vanity.......................................................................... 35 Owner's Manual ...................................................... 283
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction............................62 Modifications/Alterations Outside Rearview Mirrors .............................................. 35
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............................62 Vehicle.......................................................................... 8
Loading Vehicle........................................................97, 98 Monitor, Tire Pressure System.....................................168 P
Capacities...................................................................98 Mopar Parts ..................................................................282 Paddle Shift Mode.......................................................... 82
Tires ......................................................................... 258 Multi-Function Control Lever.......................................... 40 Paddle Shifters ............................................................... 82
Locks Paint Care ..................................................................... 270
Auto Unlock ................................................................24 N Pair (link) Uconnect Phone To A mobile Phone b... 137
Automatic Door ..........................................................24 New Vehicle Break-In Period.......................................... 74 Panic Alarm..................................................................... 13
Power Door.................................................................22 Parking Brake ................................................................. 74
Low Tire Pressure System ........................................... 168 ParkSense System, Rear ............................................... 92
Lubrication, Body ......................................................... 235 O
Occupant Restraints.....................................................172 Passenger Seat
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................................................. 273 Easy Entry .................................................................. 33
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......................... 274, 278
Oil Change Indicator ....................................................... 59 Passing Light .................................................................. 41
M Reset .......................................................................... 59 Performance ................................................................... 60
Maintenance ...................................................................53 Oil Filter, Change ..........................................................233 Performance Shift Indicator .......................................... 59
Maintenance Free Battery........................................... 231 Oil Filter, Selection........................................................233 Personalized Main Menu Bar ...................................... 123 11
Maintenance Schedule....................................... 223, 224 Oil Pressure Light............................................................ 65 Pets ............................................................................... 196
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ..................67 Oil, Engine ........................................................... 231, 278 Phone Mode ................................................................. 135
290
Pinch Protection..............................................................53 Rear Camera................................................................... 96 S

Placard, Tire And Loading Information ....................... 258 Rear ParkSense System................................................. 92 Safety ............................................................................ 123
Power Rear Seats, Folding ........................................................ 30 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle....................................... 196
Brakes ..................................................................... 273 Recreational Towing .....................................................104 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle.................................... 198
Distribution Center (Fuses) .................................... 246 Reformulated Gasoline ................................................275 Safety Defects, Reporting ............................................ 282
Door Locks .................................................................22 Refrigerant ....................................................................234 Safety Features ............................................................ 123
Mirrors ........................................................................36 Release, Hood................................................................. 54 Safety Information, Tire ............................................... 253
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .............................50 Reminder, Lights On....................................................... 41 Safety Tips .................................................................... 196
Seats...........................................................................30 Reminder, Seat Belt .....................................................173 Safety, Exhaust Gas ..................................................... 198
Steering ......................................................................83 Remote Control Satellite Radio .............................................................. 126
Sunroof.......................................................................52 Starting System ......................................................... 17 Saved Radio Stations................................................... 131
Windows .....................................................................52 Remote Keyless Entry ....................................................12 Schedule, Maintenance......................................223, 224
Power Seats Arm The Alarm ........................................................... 19 Seat Belt Reminder ........................................................ 64
Lumbar .......................................................................31 Panic Alarm................................................................ 13 Seat Belts.............................................................172, 196
Power Steering Fluid.................................................... 279 Programming Additional Key Fobs ........................... 15 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........................ 177
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts................................ 176 Unlatch The Trunk ..................................................... 13 Child Restraints....................................................... 185
Preparation For Jacking............................................... 202 Remote Sound System (Radio) Control.......................124 Energy Management Feature................................. 177
Presets.......................................................................... 131 Remote Starting Extender................................................................... 176
Pretensioners Exit Remote Start Mode............................................18 Front Seat ............................................. 172, 174, 175
Seat Belts................................................................ 177 Uconnect Customer Programmable Features ......... 18 Inspection................................................................ 196
Programmable Features.............................................. 107 Uconnect Settings ..................................................... 18 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................................. 175
Remote Starting System ................................................ 17 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................ 176
R Remote Trunk Release................................................... 54 Lap/Shoulder Belts................................................. 174
Radial Ply Tires............................................................. 262 Replacement Bulbs ......................................................250 Operating Instructions ............................................ 175
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)......................... 239 Replacement Keys.......................................................... 15 Pregnant Women .................................................... 176
Radio Replacement Tires........................................................263 Pretensioners .......................................................... 177
Presets..................................................................... 131 Reporting Safety Defects .............................................282 Rear Seat................................................................. 174
Radio Controls.............................................................. 125 Restraints, Child ...........................................................185 Reminder ................................................................. 173
Radio Mode .................................................................. 125 Restraints, Head .............................................................34 Seat Belt Extender .................................................. 176
Radio Operation .................................................. 125, 158 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .......................................220 Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................ 177
Radio Remote Controls................................................ 124 Rotation, Tires...............................................................268 Untwisting Procedure.............................................. 176
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .........................................45 Seat Belts Maintenance .............................................. 271
291
Seats................................................................................28 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...........................................267 T

Adjustment .................................................................28 Snow Tires.....................................................................264 Telescoping Steering Column........................................ 24
Easy Entry...................................................................31 Spare Tires ........................................202, 264, 265, 266 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ......................... 48
Head Restraints .........................................................34 Specifications Tilt Steering Column....................................................... 24
Heated........................................................................31 Fuel (Gasoline).........................................................278 Time Delay
Height Adjustment .....................................................30 Oil .............................................................................278 Headlight ................................................................... 41
Power..........................................................................30 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...................................... 84 Tire And Loading Information Placard ........................ 258
Rear Folding ........................................................28, 30 Sport Mode .....................................................................83 Tire Markings ................................................................ 254
Seatback Release......................................................30 Starting............................................................................ 71 Tire Safety Information ................................................ 253
Tilting ............................................................28, 30, 33 Automatic Transmission ........................................... 71 Tire Service Kit .......................................... 211, 212, 213
Vented ........................................................................32 Button......................................................................... 15 Tire Service Kit — If Equipped b .............................. 206
Ventilated ...................................................................32 Cold Weather .............................................................74 Tires..........................................198, 261, 264, 265, 268
Security Alarm ...................................................19, 20, 66 Engine Fails To Start ................................................. 74 Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................................. 263
Arm The System.........................................................19 Remote....................................................................... 17 Air Pressure ............................................................. 261
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................................15 Starting And Operating ................................................... 71 Chains ...................................................................... 267
Sentry Key Replacement ................................................15 Starting Procedures........................................................ 71 Changing.........................................................202, 203
Service Assistance ....................................................... 280 Steering Compact Spare........................................................ 265
Service Contract........................................................... 282 Column Lock .............................................................. 24 General Information............................. 261, 264, 265
Service Manuals........................................................... 283 Power ......................................................................... 83 High Speed .............................................................. 262
Settings, Audio ............................................................. 131 Tilt Column................................................................. 24 Inflation Pressure.................................................... 261
Shift Indicator Light.........................................................77 Wheel, Heated ........................................................... 25 Jacking............................................................202, 203
Shifting.............................................................................78 Wheel, Tilt .................................................................. 24 Life Of Tires ............................................................. 263
Automatic Transmission.....................................78, 79 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................................124 Load Capacity.......................................................... 258
Shoulder Belts.............................................................. 174 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ....................124 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .............. 67, 168
Side View Mirror Adjustment..........................................35 Storage ...................................................................49, 269 Quality Grading........................................................ 268
Signals, Turn................................................... 42, 69, 198 Storage, Vehicle.....................................................48, 269 Radial....................................................................... 262
Sirius Satellite Radio ................................................... 126 Store Radio Presets......................................................131 Replacement ........................................................... 263
Favorites.................................................................. 129 Storing Your Vehicle .....................................................269 Rotation ................................................................... 268
Replay...................................................................... 128 Stuck, Freeing ...............................................................220 Safety..............................................................253, 261
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Sun Roof................................................................... 52, 53 Sizes......................................................................... 255
Browse in SXM ........................................................ 129 Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag..................180 Snow Tires ............................................................... 264
Favorites.................................................................. 129 Symbol Glossary ............................................................... 9 Spare Tires .................................. 202, 264, 265, 266
Replay...................................................................... 128 Synthetic Engine Oil......................................................232 11
System, Remote Starting ............................................... 17
292
Spinning .................................................................. 262 Transmission................................................................... 79 Bluetooth Communication Link.............................. 144

Trailer Towing.......................................................... 102 Automatic...................................................78, 79, 241 Call Continuation..................................................... 142
Tread Wear Indicators ............................................ 263 Fluid..........................................................................279 Call Controls ............................................................ 140
Wheel Nut Torque................................................... 273 Maintenance............................................................241 Call Termination ...................................................... 142
To Open Hood..................................................................54 Manual ....................................................................... 76 Cancel Command.................................................... 137
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................................... 101 Shifting....................................................................... 78 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Towing..............................................................................98 Transporting Pets .........................................................196 Or Audio Device After Pairing ............................ 139
Disabled Vehicle ..................................................... 221 Tread Wear Indicators ..................................................263 Help Command ....................................................... 137
Guide ....................................................................... 100 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid)........................................................ 54 Join Calls.................................................................. 142
Recreational............................................................ 104 Trunk Release Remote Control...................................... 54 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite......... 139
Weight...................................................................... 100 Trunk Release, Emergency ............................................55 Making A Second Call While Current Call
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...................................... 104 Turn Signals ............................................................. 42, 69 Is In Progress ..................................................... 142
Traction......................................................................... 104 Managing Your Favorites........................................ 140
Traction Control............................................................ 163 U Natural Speech ....................................................... 136
Trailer Towing ..................................................................98 Uconnect Operation................................................................. 136
Hitches .................................................................... 100 Phone Call Features ................................................140 Overview .................................................................. 135
Minimum Requirements ........................................ 101 Things You Should Know About Your Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone.... 137
Tips .......................................................................... 103 Uconnect Phone.................................................142 Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device ............. 138
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................................... 101 Uconnect Settings ..................................................... 18 Phonebook Download............................................. 139
Wiring....................................................................... 102 Uconnect Phone ........................................ 136, 137, 138 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............................ 142
Trailer Towing Guide .................................................... 100 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Power-Up.................................................................. 144
Trailer Weight ............................................................... 100 Call Currently In Progress ..................................141 Recent Calls ............................................................ 141
Transfer Case Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Redial....................................................................... 142
Fluid ................................................................ 241, 279 No Call Currently In Progress.............................141 To Remove A Favorite ............................................. 140
Maintenance ........................................................... 241
293
Toggling Between Calls .......................................... 142 W Window Fogging ............................................................. 48

Touch-Tone Number Entry...................................... 141 Warning Lights Windows.......................................................................... 52
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone.............. 142 Blue ............................................................................ 69 Power ......................................................................... 52
Voice Command...................................................... 142 Green.......................................................................... 68 Windshield Defroster ................................................... 197
Uconnect Settings Red .............................................................................63 Windshield Washers ...................................................... 44
Customer Programmable Features ..........................18 White .......................................................................... 69 Fluid ......................................................................... 230
Uconnect System ......................................................... 121 Yellow ......................................................................... 66 Windshield Wiper Blades............................................. 236
Uconnect Voice Command .............................................26 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) ....... 66 Windshield Wipers.......................................................... 44
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........................................ 268 Warning Lights And Messages....................................... 63 Wipers Blade Replacement ......................................... 236
Universal Garage Door Opener (homelink®)b ..........36 Warranty Information ...................................................282 Wipers, Intermittent ....................................................... 44
Unleaded Gasoline....................................................... 274 Washer Wipers, Rain Sensitive ................................................... 45
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................................. 176 Adding Fluid .............................................................230
Washers, Windshield.............................................44, 230
V Washing Vehicle ...........................................................270
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................................35 Water
Vehicle Certification Label..............................................98 Driving Through .......................................................105
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........................... 273 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........................................266
Vehicle Loading.............................................. 97, 98, 258 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ..........................................266
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................................... 8 Wind Buffeting ................................................................ 52
Vehicle Security Alarm ....................................................19
Vehicle Storage ..................................................... 48, 269
Voice Command .................................................. 145, 147
Voice Recognition System (VR) ......................................26
11
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal
features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical
US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on
products previously manufactured. devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is
found by visiting the website on the back cover. always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 or by contacting your This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Dodge brand
1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer. dealer.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA) Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use public
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
transportation.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
WARNING
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have
been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
2023 DODGE CHALLENGER OWNER’S MANUAL
2023 DODGE CHALLENGER

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling
your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Dodge brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the
ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play ® Store and enter the search keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
©2022 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS. DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC OR FCA CANADA INC., USED UNDER LICENSE. DODGE EST UNE MARQUE FIRST EDITION
DÉPOSÉE DE FCA US LLC OU FCA CANADA INC., UTILISÉE SOUS LE PERMIS. APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC. GOOGLE PLAY STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GOOGLE. 23_LA_OM_EN_USC

Dodge Challenger 2023

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dodge Challenger 2023

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dodge Challenger 2023

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 DODGE CHALLENGER OWNER’S MANUAL

2023 DODGE CHALLENGER

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................12 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 56 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING ..................................................................................................71 4

6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 159 6

INTRODUCTION DOORS .................................................................................21 MIRRORS ............................................................................ 35

Headlight Time Delay ................................................. 41 HOOD.................................................................................... 54 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .........92 MULTIMEDIA SAFETY

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TIRES..................................................................................253

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................282

SYMBOLS KEY VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Red Warning Lights

Transmission Temperature Warning Light

Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light

Trunk Open Warning Light

Vehicle Security Warning Light

Oil Temperature Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Yellow Indicator Lights

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light

Green Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights

Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light

ECO Mode Indicator Light Blue Indicator Lights

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Key Fob Battery Replacement

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The START/STOP ignition button has four operating ACC

The push button ignition can be placed in the following CAUTION!

Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

NOTE:  If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

 Ignition in the OFF position NOTE: REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

 When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:

Trunk Passive Entry Button

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door

The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Control

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

BASIC VOICE COMMANDS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29